JP2024032882A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows the gaming machine to be appropriately managed. [Solution] A main control board 61 is provided with a setting key insertion part 68a, and operating power is supplied to a pachinko machine 10 when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion part 68a and an ON operation is performed. By starting the process, it becomes possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the winning probability of the jackpot result at least in the low probability mode varies. Further, gaming history information is stored in the management IC 66, and the gaming history management results are calculated using the historical information at the calculation timing. This management result is displayed on the notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the display state is maintained. Furthermore, in the notification display devices 69a to 69c, when a setting value is changed, a corresponding display is performed, and when an abnormal state is notified, a corresponding display is performed. [Selection diagram] Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP2009-261415A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be suitably managed.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a history storage execution means for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game;
information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
a first information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is displayed;
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display corresponding to the aspect information, the information display means does not display any information. It is characterized by not being maintained in the state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately manage gaming machines.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main controller. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which a detection result of a ball entry detection sensor is input to a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory; 3 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing output processing of a setting value update signal executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by a management CPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by management side CPU. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM in the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a separate storage memory in a third embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating repeated change monitoring processing executed by the management CPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU in the fifth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 6th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 7th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of history memory in an 8th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory; FIG. 12 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and management IC in the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the main control device in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices based on the control of the MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the management results of game history are displayed, and (b) When the setting state of the pachinko machine is changed. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the first to fourth notification display devices enter the display state. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the 1st information display device in a 12th embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the 2nd information display device. The first notification display device when displaying the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices and when displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine is in a changeable state. and FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the second notification display device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an abnormality display area in the thirteenth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing an abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing an abnormality display process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in another form.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure within the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. have The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and these inner rail portions 25 and outer rail portions 26 provide guidance means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning holes 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, if one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball enters the second operating port 34, In this case, when one game ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric winning device 32. When one game ball enters the ball, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is performed using a prize winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34, the symbol is changed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and in each symbol row, a main character numbered from "1" to "9" is set. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display for all symbol rows is first started, and then the scroll display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally, the predetermined display is displayed in each symbol row. The process ends with the symbol displayed statically. In a game round in which the game result is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, in the case of the most profitable jackpot result, which will be described later, the same combination of odd number symbols will be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the low probability jackpot result, which will be described later, the same combination of even number symbols will be stopped and displayed, and the same combination of even number symbols will be stopped and displayed, and If the result is a low win/high probability jackpot, the combination of symbols is not the same symbol combination, but a combination of symbols that is not stopped and displayed if it is not a low win/high probability jackpot result is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. be exposed. In addition, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, the display starts on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the period from displaying a predetermined result to ending is one game round. equivalent to times. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on winning to the first operating port 33 or winning to the second operating port 34, a transition is made to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 is possible. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side The ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 45, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that enters the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. While passing, it is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball that enters the out-port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). FIG. 5 is a front view of the main controller 60.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Note that although the board box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is possible to visually observe the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a from outside the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in a board box 60a such that an opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a, and It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies 60c prevent separation of these case bodies 60c and leave traces when these case bodies 60c are separated. A connecting portion 60e is provided for leaving a . A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if some of the joints 60e are destroyed and the case body 60c is separated in a state in which separation of the case body 60c is prevented using some joints 60e, another joint By bringing the portion 60e into the connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body 60c from being separated again. Furthermore, since the joint 60e is destroyed when the case body 60c is separated and traces thereof remain, it is possible to visually check the joint 60e to determine whether or not the case body 60c has been illegally separated. It becomes possible. Furthermore, a seal 60f is pasted on one side of the board box 60a opposite to the side on which the joint portions 60e are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. Thereby, when the seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of the seal 60f.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 includes a board owned by the game hall manager in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion section 68a into which a setting key is inserted and turned ON, an update button 68b operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON, and a main controller. A reset button 68c that is operated to clear data in a main side RAM 65, which will be described later, is provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to notify the management results of game history. , is provided. In addition, a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 in order to read the management results of game history or the information (programs and data) stored in the main side ROM 64 with the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided for reading. Note that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but can be any number of stages.

These setting key insertion section 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, reading terminal 68d (that is, MPU 62), and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. Further, as already explained, the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a, but the setting key insertion part 68a, update button 68b, reset button 68c, and reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall portion 60b. That is, the opposing wall portion 60b has separate openings in areas facing each of the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a without having to open the board box 60a, it is possible to press the update button 68b, and it is possible to press the reset button 68c. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion part 68a and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in this state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60), it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The state becomes changeable. In this state, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed one step at a time in ascending order within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6." Note that if the update button 68b is operated in the state of "Setting 6", the state is updated to "Setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion part 68a from the ON operation position in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion part 68a can be turned OFF. Become. When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and it becomes possible to play the game with the current setting values. In other words, even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends, the set value cannot be changed.

The ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time of the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (that is, the setting The higher the value), the higher the advantage. Details will be described later, but there are two lottery modes that determine the probability of winning a jackpot: a low probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively low, and a high probability mode in which the probability of winning is relatively high. It is set so that the higher the probability, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, regardless of the setting value, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant.

The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to clear the data, operating power must be supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed. (In other words, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The ON operation on the reset button 68c is enabled only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As already explained, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the gaming history management results or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 with the external device. In order to perform external output to the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (i.e., the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62). (need to start power supply). The connection of an external device to the reading terminal 68d is enabled only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 completes the processing at the start of supply of operating power, no external output is performed to the external device.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. becomes possible. Further, as already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are transmitted through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetical characters are displayed. On the other hand, numbers "0" to "9" are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The game history management results are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the contents of this notification will be explained in detail later. Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that the value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. In addition, the setting value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is displayed on the first to third notification display device. The information may be displayed on another one of the notification display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The main side ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main side CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, and In accordance with the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is grasped. In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, is grasped by the management IC 66.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a includes a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, and a first operating opening detection sensor. A sensor 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an outlet detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether the ball enters each ball entry section. Further, the main side CPU 63 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 33 and various lottery drawings based on winnings in the second operating port 34.

On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion section 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is placed at an ON operation position or an OFF operation position. Based on the detection result from the sensor, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

A power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball corresponding entering part of the above-mentioned ball entering part where the occurrence of the ball entering corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Ru. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there are a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the common electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32. A drawing unit 37 and a general drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure pending display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main side CPU 63 so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the general electric utility object 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the general electric utility object 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game round, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, when clearly indicating the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric utility object 34a, display control of the ordinary electric figure display section 38a is executed by the main side CPU 63. In addition, when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a variable display is started in the special symbol display section 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special symbol pending display section 37b. is executed, and when a winning occurs in the through gate 35, or when variable display is started on the common figure display section 38a, display control of the common figure pending display section 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Furthermore, the management results of the game history in the management IC 66 are notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the display of the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is controlled by the management IC 66 and not by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled by the management IC 66. Regarding the display on the third notification display device 69c, display control by the main CPU 63 is given priority over display control by the management IC 66.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may also have a configuration in which the display is controlled by the management IC 66 and the display is not controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, if the current setting value is to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. good.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. Further, when an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management results of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 are outputted to the external device.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, as already explained, the payout mechanism section 73 is provided with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the power switch is turned OFF, operation power is started to be supplied to the Pachinko machine 10. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be described using FIG. 7.

When playing a game, the main CPU 63 uses various types of counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, settings for display on the special pattern display section 37a, settings for display on the pattern display device 41, settings for display on the general pattern display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed when the winning occurs. Determine the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when playing, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 should be brought into the general electric power open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The data is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The reservation storage area 65a includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, a combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of reservation area RE2 → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .

Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. At this time, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the general utility goods release counter C4 will be explained. The general utility utility release counter C4 is configured such that, for example, it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility object release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to an open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support provided by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner into the game area PA, the general electrical accessory 34a of the second actuation port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity utility item release counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both cases). , In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the utility power utility object 34a is in the open state when the general power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. has been done. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display on the display section 38a is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the power grid per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the power grid release lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state. In addition, the secured time period that is secured between the time when one general electricity lottery is held and the next general electricity distribution lottery is held (for example, the period of time that is secured on the general electricity map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35) is In configurations where multiple types of variable display times are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. Good too. In addition, the number of times the power grid is released, the length of time it is open, the amount of time secured between one general power grid release lottery and the next power grid release lottery is shortened, and such secured time. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning.

Here, as already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode are different from each other. The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and opening mode of the utility power accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode are also the same regardless of the setting values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. It may also be a configuration. For example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the frequency of opening of the general electric accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode may be configured, and the second operation when the general electric accessory 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of a game ball entering the mouth 34 is increased. Furthermore, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening of the general electric accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the game ball entering the operating port 34 is increased.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/fail table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM 64. As the accuracy tables, low probability accuracy tables 64a to 64f for low probability mode and high probability accuracy table 64g for high probability mode are stored.

The low certainty propriety tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". In other words, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". 2 low probability correctness table 64b, low probability correctness table 64c for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and low probability correctness table 64c for setting 3 when the setting state of pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". , a low probability correctness table 64d for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", a low probability correctness table 64e for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", and the pachinko machine 10 There exists a low certainty propriety table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 6".

These low probability success/failure tables 64a to 64f are set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot result. Specifically, when the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/320, and when the low probability table 64b for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/310. When the low probability success/failure table 64c for setting 3 is referred to, the result is a jackpot at approximately 1/300, and when the low probability success/failure table 64d for setting 4 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/290. If the low probability success/failure table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/280, and if the low probability success/failure table 64f for setting 6 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/270. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, only one type of high certainty validity table 64g is provided so that it is common to any setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". The high probability success/failure table 64g is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot result is higher than the low probability success/failure tables 64a to 64f in any setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Specifically, when the high probability success/failure table 64g is referred to, a jackpot result is obtained at approximately 1/30. This makes it possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, even the lowest setting state, "Setting 1", becomes a high probability mode, making it possible to make the probability of a jackpot result higher than the low probability mode of "Setting 6", the highest setting state. becomes. In addition, in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of advantages or disadvantages depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and to suppress the storage capacity for storing the high probability probability table 64g in the main side ROM 64 in advance. becomes possible.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the state of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions: the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, round games are executed up to a predetermined number of times.

A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 32. That's true. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is fixed and the same number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for one opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short-time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. has been done.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. Further, in the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the open duration time is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, if one opening is made in a long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will receive a prize equal to the upper limit number in one round game, and one in a short-time mode. When the number of rounds is opened, it is expected that no winnings will be made to the special electric winning device 32, or that only one prize will be won, if any.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of pieces in one round game are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. is not limited to the above value and may be set arbitrarily if the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode. It is.

The distribution destinations of the jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main side ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h, as shown in FIG. In the allocation table 64h, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result are set as the destinations to which the jackpot result is distributed in the case of a jackpot result.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

For low winning and high probability jackpot results, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

In relation to each gaming state mentioned above, the normal gaming state refers to a state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, not the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a low winning/high winning jackpot result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a low winning/high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to low probability jackpot results. "15-29" corresponds to the most profitable jackpot result.

Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so that the distribution table 64h is common to any of the setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to prevent advantage or disadvantage from occurring depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the distribution mode of jackpot results, and also allows the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in advance in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress the

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the manner in which the jackpot results are distributed differs depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most profitable jackpot result, or the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most profitable jackpot result or the low winning, high probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the game will enter the high probability mode after a jackpot result. In addition, the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result.If the setting value is high, it will not be assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result, whereas if the setting value is low, the probability of being assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result will be lower. It may also be configured such that it can be distributed to jackpot results. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the opening/closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode will occur.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that can display fluctuating symbols, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This is a display state that is made to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of the variable display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making the user expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the ready-to-reach display, the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed. This includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol row. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows after the variable display of the symbols has started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows, or in some symbol rows but in a plurality of symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol column, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column. It also includes a case in which the background screen is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and a case in which the symbols on the symbol row are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a preview display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not displayed in a stopped state, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, this is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that a preview display with a low appearance rate is A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that the occurrence is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Here, the probability that a reach display will occur in a game round with a losing result is the same regardless of the setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from having an advantage or disadvantage with respect to the probability that a reach display will occur in a game round that results in a losing result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the reach display will occur in a game round that results in a losing result.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the display duration time of symbols on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main side RAM 65 is " 0'' (step S105). In other words, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning on the setting key insertion part 68a, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 will be performed with respect to the setting value information. Clearing processing of the main side RAM 65 is executed while maintaining the state before the power supply was stopped. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without changing set values.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S106). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 65, and when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process of step S105 is executed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, the setting value is determined to be normal if it is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and it is determined to be abnormal if it is "0" or 7 or more.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after executing an error notification process to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), an infinite loop occurs. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117), which will be described later.

If a positive determination is made in all steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S110, a recognition process (step S111) is performed to make the management IC 66 recognize various information, and various data are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. Data output processing is executed for this purpose (step S112). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be explained later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S112 is completed and before the process in step S113 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S112 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S113 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S113 to step S116 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S114, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S115, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 65, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S116, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. If the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113 and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, if the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (step S103: YES), the main side RAM 65 includes the area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation is being performed to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Note that this is not limited to this, and even if an operation is being performed to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, all of the main side RAM 65 is A configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not executed and the all clearing process is executed when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

After that, a set value update process is executed in step S118, and a set value update signal output process is executed in step S119, and then the process moves to step S110. The setting value update process will be explained below. Note that the output process of the setting value update signal will be explained in detail later. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process.

First, a set value counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S201). The setting value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a setting value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. When changing the setting value, the game hall manager can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S203: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process in step S207 is executed, a setting value display update process is executed (step S208). In the setting value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processes from step S204 onwards are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), a setting value display termination process is executed (step S209). In the set value display termination process, the display of the set values on the third notification display device 69c is terminated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S301). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an infinite loop is executed after executing power outage processing. Become. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S303, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S114, and in step S304, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S115.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In the subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processes from step S307 onwards are executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Thereafter, reading processing is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S309). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the output port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, and first operating port 33 are activated. , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is determined. Note that the details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S311). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the following step S312, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S308, the disconnection of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is confirmed, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed. I do.

Thereafter, a special figure special electric control process for controlling the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, general electric power control processing is executed (step S314). In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the reservation information on the general electrician side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored, Then, a release determination is made regarding the hold information, and further, using the release determination as a trigger, processing for performing a production for a regular map is executed. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process for opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Furthermore, in the case of the opening/closing execution mode, even if the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, the mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. , Output information for reflecting the increase/decrease in the number of pending information related to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure pending display section 38b is set. In addition, in step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S319). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, the special figure special electric control process in step S313 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12.

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the reservation information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of pending in the pending storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in this embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is increased by 1, and each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is set for reservation. It is stored in the first reservation area among the vacant reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of area RE. In addition, if winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occur at the same time, the process for acquiring the pending information is executed within the range of executing the pending information obtaining process once. Run multiple times. Furthermore, when new hold information is acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of pending information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase in the pending information.

Thereafter, the information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S402), and the special figure special electric line address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information on the special figure/special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure/special electric line address table (step S404), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes from step S406 to step S412 should be executed, and the special figure special electric line address table is a counter for the special figure special electric line counter. The start address of the program for executing the processes from step S406 to step S412 is set in correspondence with the numerical information.

In step S406, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on the condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES) (step S502). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and in detail, the data is shifted from the second reservation area RE2 to the first reservation area RE1. , third reservation area RE3 → second reservation area RE2, fourth reservation area RE4 → third reservation area RE3, and then the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to "0". At this time, a shift command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 to make it recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of pending information on the symbol display device 41 to display content corresponding to the decrease in the pending information.

After executing the data setting process, the validity table is read from the main side ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, information indicating the winning/losing lottery mode from the main side RAM 65 is read out to grasp the current winning/failing lottery mode. If the mode is high probability mode, the high probability correctness table 64g is read from the main side ROM 64. On the other hand, when the mode is low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65. Then, the low certainty propriety tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped setting values are read out from the main side ROM 64.

Thereafter, the validity determination process is executed with reference to the validity tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the win/fail determination process, the information for the win/fail determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1, is replaced with the jackpot numerical information set in the win/fail tables 64a to 64g read out in step S503. Determine whether or not it matches.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out of the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main side ROM 64, it is specified to which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds. Specifically, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, a low-win high-probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, information on the mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

Thereafter, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the flags used in the distribution determination process of step S506 are selected. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for miss results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either step S508 or step S509, a process for determining the duration of a gaming session is executed (step S510). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current variation is a low-probability jackpot result or a most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display will occur. Moreover, if it is not any jackpot result and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

If it is determined that a reach display will occur, refer to the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main side ROM 64 to obtain the duration of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is continued by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence stored in the main side ROM 64. Get the period. Incidentally, the continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence is different from the continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence.

The duration of the game round when there is no reach is set such that the longer the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE, the shorter the duration of the game round. In addition, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter game duration is selected than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, even if the number of pending information is the same. A duration table for reach non-occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of a game round does not vary depending on the number of pending information or the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game round when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, separate duration tables may be set for each of the case of a losing reach and the case of a losing result with no reach. In this case, the duration of the game round will be allocated according to each game result.

Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S511). The numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in a timer update process (step S310). Incidentally, as a performance for a game round, a fluctuating display of symbols on the special symbol display section 37a and a fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when each of these fluctuating displays is ended, the game cycle The final stop display is performed for a final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a state in which the stop result is displayed (a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is on standby on the active line in the symbol display device 41). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is the total time of one game round.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information about the duration of the game. Here, as mentioned above, the duration of the gaming session obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the gaming session obtained by referring to the duration table for reach occurrence. Even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the audio emission control device 81 can identify whether or not a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating the presence or absence of reach. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach. Further, the type command includes information on game results.

When the audio light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, it causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the performance for the game round. In this case, the effect of the game round is performed in a manner corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed as a performance for the game round, and when the performance for the game round ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the win/fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process is displayed. Stop display.

Thereafter, variable display of the symbols on the special figure display section 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is "0", the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "1". Thereafter, the eleventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that a game round has started should be output to the management IC 66.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S407, a process during special figure variation is executed. In the special figure variation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the duration of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set as a rule. Execute processing to change the When it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation. Update things. Note that in this embodiment, the final stop command is not sent from the main CPU 63 to the audio emission control device 81.

In step S408, special figure confirmation processing is executed. In the special figure confirmation process, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur. If the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". When a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation to the one corresponding to the special electric line start process. Update.

In step S409, a special call start process is executed. In the special call start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, an opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. The audio light emission control device 81 receives the opening command so that the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute the opening effect. If the opening period has elapsed, start processing is executed to start the first round game. In the start processing, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit duration time for keeping the special electric winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the maximum duration of the winning period of the special electric winning device 32 in the first round game of this time is set. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.

In step S410, a special electric line opening process is executed. In the special electricity release process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. If the termination condition is met, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. If the round game that has ended this time is the round game of the last run, then by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from that corresponding to the special electric line opening process to the special electric line closed process. If the round game that ended this time is the last round game to be played, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 to make the numerical information of the counter correspond to the special electric current open process. Update from a new version to one that supports special call termination processing.

In step S411, special train closed processing is executed. In the special train closing process, it is determined whether the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and conditions for ending the round game are set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special train special train counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special train closed process to that corresponding to the special train open process.

In step S412, special call termination processing is executed. In the special call termination process, if the process for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and an ending command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 81. By receiving the ending command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored in accordance with the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. In addition, more than eight types of signals will be input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the number of signals input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the exit detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a does not detect the passage of a game ball, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not being detected as a detection signal, thereby detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving a LOW level signal, and stores "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving a HI level signal. Stores information about. In other words, in a situation where the passage of a game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is not detected. In a situation where detection is being performed, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information of "0" to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The 10 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which the information of "0" is stored to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S605), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S608), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). . The third output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), the fourth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612), and The value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric line control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric prize winning flag, it is possible to input one game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into a special electric winning device 32 in a round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S619), and the sixth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S620). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the exit detection sensor 48a detects one game ball. is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the situation where the information "0" is stored to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a detects that one game ball is It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the general map and electric power control process (step S314) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1," and the general electrician that is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c. A process of storing the numerical information of the current general utility goods release counter C4 in the general electric utility holding area 65c as the general electric utility object release counter C4 on the condition that the number of pieces of holding information on the side is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. Execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general map general electric power control process (step S314), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Note that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated at a 4 msec cycle as already explained, so when one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the entry ball In a situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect that one game ball, the main CPU 63 can specify that one game ball has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. It will be done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of the processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 16.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM93, a payout side RAM94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the payout side ROM 93. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the state is such that it is possible to normally pay out the game balls, and when it is determined that the state is such that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side CPU 92 stores information in the payout side RAM 94. To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main side CPU 63 indicating that it is not possible to pay out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls. A notification command is sent to the audio light emission control device 81 so that The states in which it is not possible to normally pay out game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a state in which the payout device 76 is not filled with game balls. There is an abnormal payout state in which the game machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank sensor is canceled. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, and when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, the CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state. Specify that the no-ball state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 identifies a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is sent to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door close command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front side of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is sent to the main CPU 63 at the appropriate timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). As already explained, the full tank process is a process to identify whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if the tank is full. At the same time, a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is sent to the main side CPU 63.

Thereafter, ball unnecessary processing is executed (step S702). As already explained, in the no-ball processing, a process is performed to identify whether there is no ball or not based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if there is no ball. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S704). In the front door open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, It executes a process to stop the payout of game balls, and also sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S705). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball is At the same time, a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. After executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. A payout control process is executed to control the execution of (step S708). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, the value of prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S709).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a position in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal board 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the front door opening sensor 95 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

More specifically, regarding the main body open sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branching from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be explained. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be explained.

In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that the first game round has ended. A predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the gaming area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 performs output settings of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out game balls in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
・Ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・Ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in opening/closing execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this percentage is (referred to as “S”)
・BS × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34”
- The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + S2 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34")
- The probability of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game play, the probability of occurrence of the high frequency support mode per unit game play, etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. Note that the number of prize balls is the number of game balls that are paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing gaming history using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and the reading terminal 68d described above.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Further, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of various processes being executed by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It is equipped with These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be able to communicate in both directions.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built into the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. The management side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to maintain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and outputs the measured date and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the management CPU 112. This is a configuration that allows this. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is for storing information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122p. used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained later.

The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be explained later.

The calculation result memory 131 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be explained. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p can receive a signal to be input. When the input signal is at a LOW level, "0" information is stored as the first data, and when the input target signal is at a HI level, "1" information is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs one game ball. When a ball is detected, a first signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at the HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs a second game ball. When a ball is detected, a second signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at HI level is being input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in the situation where no new game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs the fifth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a outputs the sixth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal at a LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is being input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is present.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at LOW level when the mode is not high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at HI-level when the mode is high-frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open period is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues to output the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. and output.

An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not a game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 11th signal at LOW level until the game round starts, and outputs the 11th signal at HI level for a specific period when the game round starts. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

A setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the main CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level setting value update signal in a situation where a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Then, the HI level setting value update signal outputs a pulse signal that is maintained for a specific period for a number of minutes corresponding to the newly set setting value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The 16th buffer 122p contains an output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. input. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although the 12th buffer 122l, the 13th buffer 122m, and the 14th buffer 122n can receive signals from the main CPU 63, they are blank to which normal signals are not input in the pachinko machine 10. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p that are larger in number than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, It becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the signal paths 118l to 118n are not formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

It has been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the setting value update signal will be input to the 15th buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the instructions from the main CPU 63 can be received. Instead, the management CPU 112 can specify that the setting value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Specification of the types of these signals in the management CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 with the start of supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the identification of the types of these signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 This is done by sending a type identification command to. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied, Information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, along with information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31, information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls) is also included. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 balls). Stored. Information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, the sixth correspondence area 123f contains information indicating that the second operating port 34 is used, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is used as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that a game round has started, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n.

As described above, the configuration is such that the management CPU 112 specifies what kind of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. , it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the type of signal is recognized in advance. In addition, information for the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. The configuration is as follows. As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the main It becomes possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Additionally, the management CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n when supply of operating power is started. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Further, information setting that a setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the 15th buffer 122o and the 16th buffer 122p can reliably use the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It becomes possible to omit the process for specifying the type of signal input to the input signal. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a 1 byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, in the case of this pachinko machine 10, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k) First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is is stored in the area for storing correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry portion corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a detect game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning hole 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. If the buffer 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time is one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122g is the first to seventh buffer. The information about the type of ball entering part is read out from one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the information about the type of ball entering part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the open/close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is inputted, and a signal indicating whether a game round has been started is inputted to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is the game round is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 8th signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the 8th signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at LOW level when it is not in high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the 9th signal at HI-level when it is in high-frequency support mode. , the management side CPU 112 specifies that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high-frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that. Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the termination information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continue outputting, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both cases where the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored in the history information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125. Moreover, when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 11th signal at LOW level until the start timing of the game round, and when the start timing of the game round comes, the 11th signal at HI level continues for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 specifies that a game round has started when the eleventh signal changes from LOW level to HI level. In other words, when the 11th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, information indicating that it is a game time read from the 11th correspondence area 123k is stored in the correspondence relationship information of the history information storage area 125. Store in the area.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all the history information that has occurred during that period, even if there are 10 consecutive business days in which the pachinko machine 10 continues to fire game balls from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This allows all history information to be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information that specifies pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, if an opportunity arises to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage area 125 where the oldest history information is stored will be overwritten with new history information in order. Become.

In addition, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by an external device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0" and the pointer information of "0" becomes the writing target. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

First, a recognition output counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "14" (step S801). The recognition output counter is the remaining information output for making the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 correspond to. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As already explained, since the 14 first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n are the targets of signal type recognition, "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, output processing of an identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the signals 122n to 122n correspond to. This reduces the number of signal paths compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Furthermore, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to each other so that the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer become the signal type setting target. The recognition setting for the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "11", it is a special prize winning hole. A type identification command indicating that the device is the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “10”, a type identification command indicating that the device is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out, If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "8", it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "7", read the type identification command that indicates the opening/closing execution mode, and if the output counter for recognition is "6", it is the high frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "5", the type identification command is read out indicating that it is the front door frame 14, and if the output counter for recognition is "4", it is the game time. A type identification command indicating that the recognition output counter is between "3" and "1" is read out, and a type identification command indicating that the recognition output counter is blank is read out.

Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification type command, in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification type command is started. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 sets correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current setting target buffer among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n to correspond to the identification type command. Store information to be used.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S806). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after being subtracted by 1 is executed (steps S803 and Step S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the process of outputting the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification end command is started, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. The combination of processes from step S908 onward in the management process is executed 16 or more times before the process starts.

First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the process returns to step S901 after executing the setting update recognition process (step S902). In the setting update recognition process, the details will be described later, but when the main CPU 63 performs a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, a corresponding process is executed.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the types of the buffers 122a to 122n whose signal types are to be set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and thereafter the signal type is set to the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

Thereafter, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), a correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, the currently received type identification is placed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information about the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the process in step S906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 are performed. Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processes of steps S908 to S910 are repeatedly executed. In step S908, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, although the details will be described later. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the results of the calculations are reported on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Executes display output processing for. In step S910, although details will be described later, external output processing is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d.

FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 24(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, and FIG. 24(d) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 24(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24(a). Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t2 when the identification start command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is being sent from the main side CPU 63, and outputs the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). Further, at the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t5 when the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 24(d). In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, at each of the timings from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

Thereafter, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). Furthermore, at the timing t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t20 when the identification end command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 24(c). Thereafter, at timing t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

As described above, by using the ninth signal to make the management CPU 112 recognize whether or not a command is being output, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 as to when to store history information. Even in a configuration where command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths), it is clearly made clear to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "11" (step S1001). The managed target counter allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not there is a managed target that has not been specified as a target for determining whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. It is also a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the state of signal output to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 items, including whether the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether the high-frequency support mode is executed, whether the front door frame 14 is opened or closed, and whether the game round is started. Therefore, first, the managed counter is set to "11".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S1002). If the level is not HI (step S1002: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed counter is 5 or more, the ball entering detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed counter. to 48a is specified (step S1003).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "11" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", If the value of the counter to be managed is "10" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the counter to be managed is determined. is "9" and corresponds to the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "8". Yes, if it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "7", the first operating port detection sensor 46a is determined. If it is compatible with the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "6", which corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the output port 24a, the seventh output flag is set to "1". 1" is set. As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S1005). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, if the value of the counter to be managed is "4", it is determined whether a transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and if the value of the counter to be managed is "3", the high It is determined whether a transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has become open, and the managed counter is If the value is "1", it is determined whether the game round has started by determining whether or not the eleventh output flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S1008). Note that when the process of step S1008 is executed when the value of the managed counter is "1", the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of a game round, the first to seventh signals Then, it is determined whether a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the eleventh signals was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably identify the state. In addition, if the value of the managed target counter is "4" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and if the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended or not, and the value of the management target counter is "2" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, if the process of step S1006 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1007, if the process of step S1008 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1012). If the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processes from step S1002 onwards are executed for the managed target corresponding to the new managed target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S1101, the counter to be checked is set to "11". do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th buffer 122k will be the target for checking numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e will be the target for checking numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence areas 123a to 123n are the targets for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th correspondence area 123k becomes the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the counter to be checked is set to one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the game round. If so, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written contains the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 33. The combination of the operating port 34 and the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game times is stored as history information. In addition, if the value of the counter to be checked is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Then, a combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1105). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process in step S1105 is executed, the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked indicate whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j are displayed. Since either the information indicating that there is a door frame 14 or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether the input signal from the main CPU 63 has been input to the buffer, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S1103 (step S1108), and the writing process to the history memory 117 is further executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, if the value of the counter to be checked is in any of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. A combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, and termination information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125. The state will be as follows. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as step S1105 (step S1110).

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, if a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1112). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process from step S1102 onward is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27. 27(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and FIG. 27(b) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 27(c) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27(d) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 27E shows the timing of writing history information into the history memory 117.

At timing t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIG. 27(a). Therefore, at the timing t1, history information is written into the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 27(e). Thereafter, at timing t2, the signal that was switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level, as shown in FIG. 27(a). However, since the signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not subject to storage of history information, the signal at t2 is At this timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG. 27(e).

Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the No. 11 buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 27(e).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t4 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the field is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t8 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also included in the high frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has hit a field is in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t12 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the one or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the front door frame 14 is when the front door frame 14 is being opened.

Next, a process for outputting a setting value update signal that is executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the output process of the setting value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the output process of the setting value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

A value corresponding to the currently set value of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is set to the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal directed to the management side CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As already explained, the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the setting value update signal output process is a process for causing the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). It is executed before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, since it is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 that the set value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, the set value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the process is executed, it becomes possible for the management CPU 112 to identify that the signal being input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the setting value update signal.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1203), and whether the value of the LOW level counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not. (Step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period of time while the set value update signal outputs a plurality of pulses in which the set value update signal becomes HI level. It is. If the value of the LOW level counter is "0" (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. settings (step S1205).

Thereafter, "20" is set in the HI level counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is subtracted by 1 at a cycle of approximately 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

If the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. settings (step S1209).

Thereafter, the value of the pulse number counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of pulse signals by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. Since this means that there is no data, "20" is set in the LOW level counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is subtracted by 1 at a cycle of approximately 10 microseconds, the value is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between the plurality of pulse outputs caused by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

If the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), the output of pulse signals by the set value update signal corresponding to the currently set set value of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. Therefore, output processing of a setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The setting value identification end command is a command for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the output of the setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize the currently set setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals inputted to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same way as the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command.

As described above, in the process of outputting the setting value update signal, a pulse signal is output to the management IC 66 by the setting value update signal for a number of minutes corresponding to the value of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 that was set at the start of the current supply of operating power. do. By executing the setting update recognition process, the management side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals generated by the setting value update signal, and grasps the currently set setting value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the number of pulse signals.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of a setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303 or if the process in step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1308). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by executing the setting update recognition process as described above, the information indicating that the setting was made, the date and time when the setting was made, and the A combination of setting values when settings are made is stored in the history area 124 as history information. As a result, by reading out and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be updated to the date and time when it was newly set and the relevant setting. It becomes possible to understand the contents of the setting values when the settings are made.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted. It is calculated using historical information that exists before and after. In this case, as mentioned above, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set is stored in the history memory 117, so an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters during a period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during which the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. Note that the display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether or not it is calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the previous affirmative determination was made in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the number of balls entering each type during normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the output port 24a is stored, Calculate the number of balls entering. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the general winning hole 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball enters the general winning hole 31. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information about the first actuation port 33 is stored. Calculate the number of balls entering. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the second actuation port 34 is stored. Calculate the number of balls entering.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 where the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and the end information are stored, the exit that occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be detected. 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored; The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where is stored, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1403, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1402 is The difference between the number of balls entered in the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1403. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number K3 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402. The number of balls entered is K4, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402 is set as the number K5 of balls entered.
・First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the technique area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/"Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Third parameter: Game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K3/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) 4th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K4/discharging from gaming area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
- Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 '') In step S1404, the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the normal storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when step S1404 is executed next time and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters that were previously stored in the normal storage area are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information, and the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode exists. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the end information is stored, the out exit 24a and the general winning opening 31 that have occurred in the opening/closing execution mode are , the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1405). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information are stored, and correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, and correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled as being in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method for calculating the number of balls entered is the same as in step S1403, except that the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1406, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1405 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1406. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 is defined as the number K13 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405. The number of balls entered is K14, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1406 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1406 is set as the number of balls entering K15.
- 11th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "First operating opening 33 Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
- 12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) - 13th parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K13/total number of game balls ejected from gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K14/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・Fifteenth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K15/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
- 16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- 17th parameter: (K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34 18th parameter: K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31") "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34"'') In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the opening/closing execution mode are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. In other words, when step S1407 is executed next time and the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode. , the previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters previously stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and termination information are stored, the output 24a, general The number of balls entering each of the winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where , the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information is stored is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that occur when the front door frame 14 is in an open state. and the number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period of high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1409, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1408 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1409. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number K23 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408. The number of balls entered is K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1409 is set as the number K25 of balls entered.
- 21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
・22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K22/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・23rd parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K23/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・24th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K24/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
・25th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
・26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. In other words, when step S1410 is executed next time and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters that were previously stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the opening/closing execution mode is determined. Calculate the number of occurrences. In addition, the number of occurrences of a game game is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game game is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is assumed to be the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the gaming session is assumed to be the number of occurrences K32.
・31st parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when step S1411 is executed next time and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that until then the opening/closing execution mode is The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information and start information indicating that the high frequency support mode Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. In addition, the number of occurrences of a game game is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game game is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is set as the number of occurrences K41, the number of occurrences of the game game is set as the number of occurrences K42, and the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is set as the number of occurrences K43.
・41st parameter: K41/K42
・42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the forty-first and forty-second parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st and 42nd parameters stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when step S1412 is executed next time and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st and 42nd parameters that were previously stored in the high frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process in step S1412 is executed, display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing display processing.

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display content of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to display the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. The parameters and the calculation results of the 41st and 42nd parameters are notified. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. Furthermore, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the one place is displayed on the third notification display. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameters, and the 41st to 41st parameters are used. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the last order, is displayed, the display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. The calculation result for one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters described above in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c at least once.

When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0". It is determined whether the timing has come (step S1502). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, the 41st to 42nd parameters, and the display target counters "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter that is the first display target becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In this case, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504 or if the process in step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. control (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, The number corresponding to the 1's digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The content displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 continues until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. Ru. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

When the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started by executing the display process as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display devices 69a It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

The display of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c starts after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similar to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the gaming history management results calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped are displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is sent from the main CPU 63, the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is displayed. The display of the management results starts after the identification end command is sent from the main CPU 63. As a result, even if the third notification display device 69c is configured to double as a display device for displaying information corresponding to set values and displaying game history management results, the display of these displays is It is possible to prevent periods from overlapping.

Furthermore, when information corresponding to the set value is to be displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game history management results are being displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the information corresponding to the setting value and the gaming history management result is being displayed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, we will discuss the processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32(a) is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, this data output processing is immediately terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. As a result, in order to output historical information and various parameters to the outside, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. It is necessary to The power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided on the dispensing mechanism section 73 mounted on the back of the back pack unit 15. In order to do this, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back side of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, in order to output historical information and various parameters to the outside, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration in which it is necessary to read history information and various parameters, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the game hall manager to read the history information and various parameters.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 68d, the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is confirmed to be It is determined whether the control information (program and data) confirmation is supported (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to confirm both control information and history information and various parameters.If confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the external device, the external device A signal for confirming control information is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the external device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the external device for checking control information and the external device for checking history are separate. In this case, if an external device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for checking the history is connected to the reading terminal 68d. If the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the external device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output processing, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to read the control information with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and confirm whether the control information is genuine or normal. It becomes possible to do this.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32(b), when the output state of the output instruction signal input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 (Step S1701: YES), reads the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and outputs the read history information and various parameters to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). This allows the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d to read the history information and various parameters, and it becomes possible to analyze the information on the gaming history management results. Moreover, when the management side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, it clears the history memory 117 to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is erased only when the history information is read by an external device.

Returning to the explanation of the data output process (FIG. 32(a)), when the process of step S1603 is executed or the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d continues. It is determined whether or not (step S1605). If it is being continued (step S1605: YES), the process remains on standby in step S1605. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set to be executed after the data output processing from being executed until the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d. If the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d (step S1605: NO), this data output process ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, the game ball is paid out, so the player can choose either of these ball entry ports. The player plays the game while hoping that the game ball will land in the ball. In this configuration, the game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section). If this occurs, the corresponding history information will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry, and this managed information can be used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters each history target ball entry section. Furthermore, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry units that eject game balls from the gaming area PA are subject to storage processing of historical information and are subject to management using historical information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry for any history target ball entry section using history information. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp in detail the history of the entry of game balls into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 contains not only history information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and whether the game ball is in the high-frequency support mode. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are stored. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device that is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the external device and use the read history information to analyze how the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is outputted to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified whether the information to be outputted from the reading terminal 68d is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the identification result is outputted to the outside through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in a configuration in which historical information is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the historical information. The specified information is output externally. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the reading terminal 68d is used also, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be outputted from the outside from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, and includes a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d within the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

The main side CPU 63 executes processing for causing a game ball to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball into any of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the management side CPU 112, and processes for storing history information in the history memory 117 are executed by the management side CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to do so.

The main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened, Information corresponding to the start of the game round is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to to the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . This allows the management IC 66 to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area. It becomes possible to do so.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

By switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is being Thereby, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, each piece of history information includes correspondence relationship information indicating the type of the history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to specify how the game ball enters each history target ball entry section using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th -18th parameter, 21st - 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st - 42nd parameter) are calculated. Various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the results of calculations using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding history information corresponding to a situation where the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. In addition, various parameters are calculated corresponding to each of the opening/closing execution mode situation and the high frequency support mode situation. This allows the manager of the game hall and the like to understand the manner in which game balls enter the game according to each situation.

When the history information in the history memory 117 is output to an external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the history memory 117 clearing process. As a result, an amount of history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is stored in the history memory 117, and history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it less likely to occur.

In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . As a result, by using the information outputted externally through the external terminal board 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the balls can be easily grasped, and the history By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entry section and the frequency of ball entry.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6". Thereby, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode varies depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the state. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. Furthermore, since it is possible to make the high probability correctness table 64g referred to in the high probability mode common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the accuracy tables 64a to 64g can be prepared in advance in the main ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storage.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6", while the distribution mode of the type of jackpot result depends on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since it is possible to make the distribution table 64h that is referred to when sorting the types of jackpot results the same regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h can be stored in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing the information in advance.

Even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not deleted and is retained. As a result, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory 117 can be stored for a long period of time. Using the history information accumulated in 117, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history.

In a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not deleted and is retained even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the new setting for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is If this is done, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made and history information after the new setting is made.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117, information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to specify the contents of setting values set in the past by referring to the history information.

Note that when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, history information stored after the history information corresponding to the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference. It is also possible to use a configuration in which various parameters are calculated. In this case, it is possible to derive the game history management results as various parameters at a timing after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

In addition, when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and corresponding to a change in setting value is used as a reference. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using history information stored later than that. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the gaming history management results at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Further, although the circuit board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is exposed on the opposing wall 60b. It may also be covered by. In this case, it is necessary to open the board box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the validity table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 includes an area 161 for setting 1, an area 162 for setting 2, an area 163 for setting 3, an area 164 for setting 4, an area 165 for setting 5, and an area for setting 6. 166 are provided. The setting 1 area 161 includes a low probability win/fail table 161a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 161b for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is high probability mode is stored. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low probability win/fail table 162a for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 162b for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 3 area 163 includes a low probability win/fail table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 163b for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 3" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

The setting 4 area 164 includes a low probability win/fail table 164a for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 164b for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 5 area 165 includes a low probability win/fail table 165a for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 165b for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 6 area 166 includes a low probability win/fail table 166a for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 166b for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low probability success/failure tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/320, and when the low probability table 162a for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/310. If the low probability success/failure table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the result will be a jackpot at approximately 1/300, and if the low probability success/failure table 164a for setting 4 is referred to, the result will be approximately 1/290. If the low probability success/failure table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/280, and if the low probability success/failure table 166a for setting 6 is referred to, it will be a jackpot result at approximately 1/270. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high probability success/failure tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high probability success/failure table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/45, and when the high probability success/failure table 162b for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/40. When the high probability success/failure table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the result is a jackpot at approximately 1/35, and when the high probability success/failure table 164b for setting 4 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/30. If the high probability success/failure table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result will be a jackpot at approximately 1/25, and if the high probability success/failure table 166b for setting 6 is referred to, the result will be approximately 1/20. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

In other words, in the first embodiment, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the higher the winning probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode is, while the winning probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is "setting 1". ~ "Setting 6" The configuration is the same regardless of the setting state, but in this embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are The configuration is such that the higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage of having a high set value set.

In addition, even if the jackpot result in the low probability mode has a winning probability in the case of "Setting 6" which is the highest setting state, the winning probability in the jackpot result in the high probability mode in the case of "Setting 1" which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than the probability. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and it is also possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". 6'', it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely high.

On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so that the distribution table 64h is common to any of the setting states "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". This makes it possible to prevent advantage or disadvantage from occurring depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the distribution mode of jackpot results, and also allows the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in advance in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress the

Note that the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a higher value, while the probability of winning a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher. A configuration may be adopted in which the set value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player. becomes possible.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a higher value, while the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". '' may be configured to be constant in the setting state. In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the setting value of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player, and in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from giving rise to an advantage or disadvantage. Become.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in how the game history management results are handled when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 in addition to each memory in the first embodiment as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. These first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 contain information on the management results of game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, information on the management results of the game history according to the first embodiment described above. The various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, and 41st to 42nd parameters) described in 1. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the various parameters are stored in the nth separate storage area 172. The areas to be stored are switched so that the storage areas 172 to 176→n+1 separate storage areas 172 to 176. If the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters have been stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are deleted. As a result, various parameters for the pachinko machine 10 until new settings are executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. be remembered for that.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by an external device by connecting it to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history before a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 35.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S1802). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803 or if the process in step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, repeat change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). The repeated change monitoring process will be described in detail later, but when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly occurs in a short period of time, a process is executed to notify the new setting. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management results of the game history are intended to be used when games are played over a predetermined period of time. It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting state. On the other hand, by repeatedly executing the change monitoring process, if such an act is performed, a corresponding notification will be issued.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In various arithmetic processing, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st parameters) are ~42nd parameter) are calculated.

Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the area to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 to enable the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is such that when various parameters are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the area in the next order. will be updated to. By executing the process of step S1808, various parameters at that time point are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the current new settings of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). In other words, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 history information is deleted.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1812). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

First, it is determined whether the number of games played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are determined by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the start of a game round. The number of times the game has been played since the state was last set is determined, and it is further determined whether the determined number of times the game has been played is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). As already explained, the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain the memory, and thus does not require an external power supply to retain the value of the repeat change counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of game times exceeding the reference number of times is determined to be the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether the limit has been exceeded or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repeated changes is executed (step S1904). In the repeated change display process, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are changed to correspond to the number of times that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 exceeds the notification standard value in a short period of time. The display content is subject to repeated changes. The display content of this repeated change is the display content of displaying "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. In addition, the state in which the display contents of repeated changes are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continues until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repeated change flag is a flag used by the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of repeated changes should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeat change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repeat change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. Thereafter, the repeat change flag in the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on the condition that the repeat change flag in the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeat change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are The display is ended (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted. Thereby, it becomes possible to leave in the history memory 117 the history information of the games executed after the new settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been made.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as a gaming history management result using the history information in the history memory 117 at that time. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history in the situation before a new setting is made in the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is not possible to grasp the management results of the gaming history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information in the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the various calculated parameters are stored in a separate storage memory. 171. As a result, even if a new setting is made in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting is made at any subsequent timing.

By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of a plurality of setting states. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of gaming history over a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting state is set. Furthermore, even if new settings for the pachinko machine 10 are repeated under conditions where no games are being played, the various parameters calculated using the historical information of the conditions where games are actually being played are It is possible to increase the possibility that the data remains in the separate storage memory 171.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by an external device by connecting it to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history before a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management results of the game history are intended to be used when games are played over a predetermined period of time. It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting state. On the other hand, by repeatedly executing the change monitoring process, if such an act is performed, a corresponding notification will be issued. This makes it possible to notify the administrator and the like that new settings for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeatedly made in a short period of time.

Notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time is performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to detect whether a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly set in a short period of time by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible to make notifications.

In a situation where it is necessary to notify that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly made in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change will continue to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. , the notification of the game history management results during normal times is not performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to emphasize the notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that the notification corresponding to the notification is executed, the notification is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which when the number of events for which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and the number of events continues to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance part (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined ball entry port) If the event for which the new setting is made exceeds the notification standard value and the event for which the new setting is made continues in a situation where the total number of game balls that have entered the game balls (combination) and are ejected is within the standard number, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, an event in which a new setting is made in a situation where the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within the reference number is notified. It may be configured such that when the reference value is exceeded continuously, a corresponding notification is executed.

Furthermore, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed exceeding the notification reference value within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds), a corresponding notification may be executed.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. However, the setting value was changed in a situation where the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 was set was within the standard number of times. It may also be configured such that when an event continues to exceed a notification reference value, a corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that a corresponding notification is executed at the same time, the new setting is triggered in a situation where the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times. A configuration may also be adopted in which, when events for which various parameters are calculated exceed the notification reference value and continue, a corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration has been described in which a corresponding notification is executed, in addition to or in place of this, a configuration may also be adopted in which the progress of the game is restricted for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that the repeat change monitoring process is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the setting value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the repeated change monitoring process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which repeated change monitoring processing is executed when a setting value is changed.

First, it is determined whether the number of games played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main side RAM 65 is provided with a game counter for counting the number of games played after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Each time the number of games is played, the value of the number of games counter is incremented by one. The game count counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repeated change counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the repeat change counter after being incremented by 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of game times exceeding the reference number of times is determined to be the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not the limit has been exceeded.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, a repeat change flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2004). The repeated change flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is such that notification of repeated changes should be made. The repeated change flag is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Thereafter, on the condition that the repeat change flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repeat change monitoring process, if the repeat change flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repeat change notification command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the audio light emission control device 81 receives a repeat change notification command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 to notify the repeat change. The notification of the repeated change continues until the supply of operating power to the audio emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed without opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible for the administrator to recognize that new settings have been made repeatedly in a short period of time.

Additionally, in addition to or in place of the configuration in which, when new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, a notification command for repeated changes is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81. A configuration may also be adopted in which external output corresponding to this is performed.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the main side CPU 63 executes the repeated change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 executes the repeated change monitoring process in the third embodiment. This makes it possible to strictly monitor whether new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management side CPU 112 is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S2102). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or if the process in step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are determined by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the start of a game round. The number of times the game has been played since the state was last set is determined, and it is further determined whether the determined number of times the game has been played exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, it is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game balls have been ejected from the game area PA is stored is the standard number (specifically, 1000 pieces). A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the value exceeds . In addition, correspondence relationship information indicating that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined combination) The configuration may be such that it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which are stored exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces).

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that the notification corresponding to the notification is executed, the notification is not limited to this, and the total discharge of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which when the number of events for which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and the number of events continues to exceed the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance part (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined ball entry port) If the event for which the new setting is made exceeds the notification standard value and the event for which the new setting is made continues in a situation where the total number of game balls that have entered the game balls (combination) and are ejected is within the standard number, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, an event in which a new setting is made in a situation where the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within the reference number is notified. It may be configured such that when the reference value is exceeded continuously, a corresponding notification is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processing, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output processing (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st parameters) are ~42nd parameter) are calculated.

Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the area to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 to enable the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is such that when various parameters are stored in an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the next area in order. will be updated to. By executing the process in step S2108, various parameters at that time point are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the current new settings of the pachinko machine 10.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process in step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). In other words, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 history information is deleted.

After that, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, on the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117, the history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information and are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if new settings for the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, the separate storage memory 171 will essentially retain information on the management results of game history as a result of games being played. It becomes possible to store the information.

Note that the process in step S2109 may be executed on the condition that the processes in step S2107 and step S2108 have been executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. The first counters 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the check target counter in step S2201.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current counters to be checked are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that it is in the high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. The information on the first state is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114. and when the output state of the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the 10th signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or if the process in step S2203 is executed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level by checking whether it has been changed from "0" to "1" ( Step S2204). Note that if the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The first state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Further, if the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The second state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Furthermore, if the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. Information on the third state is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth total counters 141a to 141n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the eleventh counter 141k for totaling is the target of addition, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling is the target of addition, If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a becomes the addition target.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If the state is the first state (step S2206: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2207). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th counter 142k for the first state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state becomes the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state becomes the target of addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether it is in the high-frequency support mode (step S2208). In the case of the second state (step S2208: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2209). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th counter 143k for the second state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state becomes the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state becomes the target of addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is reached, that is, whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th counter 144k for the third state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state becomes the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state becomes the target of addition.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process in step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processes from step S2202 onwards are executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of times a game ball enters the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the opening/closing execution The number of times a mode has occurred, the number of times a high-frequency support mode has occurred, and the number of times a game has occurred are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as frequency information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

With this configuration in which the number of times information is stored instead of the history information, there is no need to perform a process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303 or if the process in step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the eleventh counter 141k for totaling, which measures the number of times the game has been executed, is opened and closed in the totaling area 141 in the history memory 117. The eighth totaling counter 141h that measures the number of occurrences of the mode, and the ninth totaling counter 141i that measures the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the totaling area 141 in the history memory 117. Clear to "0" (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, the information on the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs is cleared to "0" with the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 being set. be done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode with respect to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In a configuration in which the probability of winning a jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as described above, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting values by making them correspond to the game content after the new settings are made. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 will be " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry is managed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by new settings of the pachinko machine 10. becomes possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of times a game ball enters the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the high frequency support The number of times a mode has occurred and the number of times a game has occurred are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Furthermore, with this configuration in which the number of times information is stored instead of the history information, there is no need to perform a process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

The information on the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs are cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode with respect to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In a configuration in which the probability of winning a jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as described above, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting values by making them correspond to the game content after the new settings are made. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 will be " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry is managed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by new settings of the pachinko machine 10. becomes possible.

Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as is even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41) when the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed. As a result, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting value is not changed before or after, information on the number of times the game has been executed, information on the number of times the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and high-frequency support. The information on the number of times the mode occurs is never cleared to "0", and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information on the number of times the game is executed, information on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs, and high-frequency support mode It becomes possible to clear the information on the number of occurrences to "0".

In addition, in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 are provided that correspond to the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, ie, "setting 1" to "setting 6", respectively. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to "setting 1", a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to "setting 2", and " A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to "setting 3", a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to "setting 4", and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to "setting 5". A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to "setting 6."

Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to store history information in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6." In this case, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is made are stored as history information. , it becomes possible to store history information separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when setting a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

Note that each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 includes the total area 141, first state area 142, second state area 143, and third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a combination of the following is set.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6". In addition, in this embodiment, since the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require an external power supply for memory retention, is provided with a set value grasping counter, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the set value grasping counter is also memorized and held.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the set value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 or if the process in step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the setting value understanding counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as the storage target of history information and the reference target when calculating various parameters ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "1", it means that "setting 1" has been set, so the history memory 181 for setting 1 is used as a storage target for history information and for various parameters. Set as a reference target during calculation. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "2", it means that "setting 2" has been set, so the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "3", it means that "setting 3" has been set, so the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Furthermore, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "4", it means that "setting 4" has been set. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "5", it means that "setting 5" has been set, so the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "6", it means that "setting 6" has been set, so the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage target of history information in step S2406 are selected from among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memory 181 to 186 that is the storage target, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified, and the pointer information that is the current writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information located therein. Further, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set and RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S2409). In the update process, among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6, the history memories 181 to 186 that were set to store history information in step S2406 are selected, and the history memories 181 to 186 are The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and incremented by 1. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, as the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided so as to correspond to "settings 1" to "setting 6", respectively. This makes it possible to store game history in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6." In this case, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is made are stored as history information. , it becomes possible to store history information separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when setting a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

Note that the history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which six memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided; An area corresponding to history memory 181 for setting 2, an area corresponding to history memory 182 for setting 2, an area corresponding to history memory 183 for setting 3, and an area corresponding to history memory 184 for setting 4. An area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, in a situation where history information is stored using one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made. is performed, the history information in one of the history memories 191, 192 is left without being erased until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191, 192. In addition, new history information can be stored in both history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 and 192. Become.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is changed to " 1" (step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503 or if the process in step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag is set to the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that were previously set to store history information after the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. This flag is used by the management CPU 112 to specify whether or not not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memory 191 and 192 are to be stored as history information. In addition, since a setting change occurrence flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require an external power supply for memory retention, a setting change will occur even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the flag is retained.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, writing processing to each history memory 191, 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the write target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the pointer information that is the write target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In addition, in the writing process, by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is specified, and the pointer information that is the writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

Thereafter, update processing for each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In addition, in the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 46.

If the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to "1" (step S2601: NO), the side that is the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is This means that only historical information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are current storage targets are determined (step S2602). A storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, and when the value of the storage target flag is "0", the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is "1". In this case, the second history memory 192 becomes the storage target. Note that since the storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag will remain unchanged. The value of is stored and retained.

Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 that is the storage target.

On the other hand, if the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2601: YES), the storage target is selected from among the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the situation is such that history information should be stored not only on one side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

When the process of step S2603 or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2605). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not to be stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so the gaming area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that game balls have been ejected are stored. In addition, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "1", the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so the game ball is transferred from the game area PA to the first history memory 191. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a has been discharged is stored. Note that rather than determining whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected from the gaming area PA is stored, the determination is made based on whether a game round has been executed. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "100") or more of history information indicating .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the process of changing the storage target, the value of the storage target flag in the calculation result memory 131 is set to a value between two values that is different from the current value, thereby changing the memory for the first history 191 and the second memory 192. Change the side that is to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to "1". Furthermore, if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to "0". As a result, the history memories 191 and 192, which store only history information from games executed after the new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set, are set as storage targets. Then, various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 that are newly stored, so that the parameters are executed after the new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set. It becomes possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

Thereafter, clearing processing is performed for the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that have been the storage targets up to that point (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is cleared to "0". 0" Clear. Thereafter, the setting change occurrence flag in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47.

If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), which side of the first history memory 191 and second history memory 192 is to be stored is determined (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is recognized as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the second history memory 191 is determined as the storage target. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the storage target history memories 191 and 192 ascertained in step S2702. By doing this, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the various calculated parameters are calculated. The results are stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process in step S2703 is executed, display processing is executed (step S2704). The contents of the display process are the same as the display process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, While the history memories 191 and 192 that were to be stored remain as storage targets, history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not to be stored. If a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the ejection of game balls from the gaming area PA is stored in the history memory 191, 192 on the side that is not the storage target, the history information is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are used as storage targets as they are, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that were previously storage targets are cleared to "0". As a result, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of games played with the newly set setting value. Become.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time in order to prevent various parameters from being calculated appropriately, Memories 191 and 192 are maintained unchanged. Thereby, even if new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management results of the game history up to that point.

Note that the history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided; A configuration may be adopted in which a first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and a second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 are set.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only one history memory 117 is provided. In this case, if the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA exceeds a predetermined number after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. The configuration may be such that the history information before the timing when the setting is made is deleted, and the history information after the timing when the setting is made is stored and held without being deleted. As a result, at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information has been accumulated after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information before the timing when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set It becomes possible to erase information. In addition, by storing the corresponding history information in the history memory 117 at the timing when a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored in the history memory 117. It becomes possible to distinguish between history information before and after the timing at which the process was performed.

Furthermore, the timing of erasing the history information is limited to when the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA reaches a predetermined number or more after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Instead, it may be the case that the number of games played after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.

In addition, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting value has not been changed before or after, the changes in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above and the history information The history memory 191, 192 to be stored as described above is configured so that deletion is not performed, and when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the setting value is changed before and after that. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which changes are made and history information is deleted.

<Ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. 2 signals are inputted, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is inputted to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is inputted as the 10th signal to the 10th buffer 122j, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is inputted as the 11th signal to the 11th buffer 122k, and the setting value update signal is inputted to the 15th buffer 122j. However, in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of a game round is input to the 11th buffer 122k as a game round signal, a set value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input during the opening/closing execution mode. The signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as a signal, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122n as a high-frequency support mode signal. It is input to buffer 122o.

The game time signal is input to the 11th buffer 122k, the setting value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, the opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the 14th buffer 122n is inputted to the 14th buffer 122n. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode signal is input, the door open signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. The management CPU 112 can specify, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, that the corresponding signals are input to the eleventh to sixteenth buffers 122k to 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j whose signal types are to be recognized (step S2801). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, the respective output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In this embodiment, when the management CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal is determined. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as . The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j are understood as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the signal type.

In step S2803, if the value of the recognition output counter is one of "10", "9", and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "4", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the payout of the game ball is not executed, so the output number counter Set "0" to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "3" to "1", the corresponding ball entry part does not exist and is blank, so the output number counter is set to "0".

Thereafter, output processing of a start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2808). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output processing, output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 and executes processing to recognize the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output processing, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process in step S2901 is executed again. The contents of the setting update recognition process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal is being received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception frequency counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception frequency counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception frequency counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the process in step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence relationship setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception frequency counter. Store the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, second correspondence area 123b, and third correspondence area 123c, and "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the fourth correspondence area 123d. is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first actuation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the area 123f. Further, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

If a negative determination is made in step S2904, or if the process in step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process from step S2905 onward is executed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912, and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 51(a) shows a period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(b) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, and FIG. 51(c) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level. ) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 51(d) shows the period when the output state of the signal during opening/closing execution mode is at HI level, and FIG. 51(e) shows the period when the output state of the signal is at HI level. FIG. 51(f) shows the period in which the output state of the signal is at HI level during the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 51(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 51(h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S2908) is executed by the management CPU 112 is shown.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112, at the timing t1, the first signal , the output states of the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 51(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, at timing t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "1" is written as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in FIG. 51(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the second The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, each type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, the value of the reception number counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, a state is reached in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "10" is written as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e), the output state of the third signal, opening/closing execution mode signal, and high-frequency support mode signal becomes LOW. level is changed to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball part that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of objects is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple types of ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry parts in the history information. Specifically, since both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 have one prize ball, it is difficult to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the historical information even in a configuration in which historical information is stored as in this embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether a game round has started, information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, Regarding the information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect and the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open, the main side CPU 63 confirms that the signal path corresponds to these information. The management CPU 112 can specify the correspondence relationship information without receiving the correspondence information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is information that requires the main CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j from the management CPU 112. Become. When the correspondence relationship information is to be recognized by the management side CPU 112, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch route SL21 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the first signal route SL11, and the first branch route SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch route SL22 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the second signal route SL12, and the second branch route SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch route SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal route SL13, and the third branch route SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch route SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal route SL14, and the fourth branch route SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch route SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal route SL15, and the fifth branch route SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch route SL26 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the sixth signal route SL16, and the sixth branch route SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch route SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal route SL17, and the seventh branch route SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main side CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. Since there is no need to do this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents fraudulent activity in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. .

<Eleventh embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of a display device for displaying game history management results. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of the main control device 60 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 was provided with a first notification display device 69a, a second notification display device 69b, and a third notification display device 69c, but in this embodiment, the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c were provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposite wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. becomes possible. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in such a manner that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are exposed through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display screen of 204 to 204.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed. On the other hand, numbers in the range of "0" to "9" are displayed on the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204. The game history management results are notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 display the management result of the game history that is the target of notification (the first to eighth parameters in the first embodiment, the eleventh to 18th parameters, Displays corresponding to the types of parameters (21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are performed, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display the notification target. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history of the type being played is displayed.

Specifically, the types of game history management results are the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters in the first embodiment. exists. The first notification display device 201 displays a display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified. Specifically, "A" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 when any one of the 1st to 8th parameters is targeted for notification, and when any of the 11th to 18th parameters is targeted for notification. If the notification target is set, "E" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and if any of the 21st to 26th parameters is the notification target, the first notification display device 201 displays If "H" is displayed in 201, and any of the 31st parameters are to be notified, "L" is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are to be notified. If it is a target, "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

The second notification display device 202 displays an order corresponding to the type of game history management results to be notified among the arrangement order of the gaming history management results in the parameter group to be notified. To explain the parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is the target of notification, "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is If the third parameter is targeted for notification, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the third parameter is targeted for notification. is displayed, and if the fourth parameter is to be notified, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and if the fifth parameter is to be notified, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202. If "5" is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is the target of notification, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is the target of notification. If there is, "7" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the eighth parameter is the notification target. Further, to explain the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters as an example, when the 21st parameter is the target of notification, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd If the parameter is the target of notification, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and if the 23rd parameter is the target of notification, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. 3" is displayed, and when the 24th parameter is the target of notification, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 25th parameter is the target of notification, the second “5” is displayed on the notification display device 202, and “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is the notification target.

In detail, regarding the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number corresponding to the tens place of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100 is It is displayed on the display device 203, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters Displays corresponding to the calculation results of the parameters are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the last order, is displayed, the first parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. The calculation result will be displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters mentioned above in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are to be reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the first embodiment, not only the game history management results are notified, but also a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. , the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, whereas the first to fourth notification display devices 204 arranged horizontally are located at the right end. The value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In other words, when "Setting 1" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "Setting 2" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. "2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and if "Setting 3" is selected in the changeable state, "3" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and the change is possible. When “Setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “Setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification display device 204 displays “4”. "5" is displayed on the display device 204, and when "setting 6" is selected in the changeable state, "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Next, the electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62.

As already explained, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208.

The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 via a signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the first display IC 205, the display data stored in the memory buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the first notification display device. 201 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the first display IC 205 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the display can be performed on the first display IC 205 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the first notification display device 201.

The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through a signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through a signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the second display IC 206, the display data stored in the memory buffer can be stored and retained, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the second notification display device. 202 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the second display IC 206 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206, the display can be displayed on the second display IC 206 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the second notification display device 202.

The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through a signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through a signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the third display IC 207, the display data stored in the storage buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the third notification display device. 203 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the third display IC 207 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the third display IC 207, the display can be displayed on the third display IC 207 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the third notification display device 203.

The fourth display IC 208 is provided corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL37 and electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 via a signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is controlled according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the fourth display IC 208, the display data stored in the storage buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the fourth notification display. 204 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, In this case, the fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208, the fourth display IC 208 can display information even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the fourth notification display device 204.

The output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, but output settings for the display data are performed by the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, respectively. That is, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management side CPU 112 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the period during which the display data output setting is performed in each of the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 is adjusted so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 is performed. In contrast, the management CPU 112 does not perform display data output settings. On the other hand, in a state where the set value is not changeable, the management side CPU 112 sets the display data output, whereas the main side CPU 63 does not set the display data output.

Note that, if the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 are performed at the same time, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 takes priority. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 is prioritized.

Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 55.

First, the value of the update timing counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter used by the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display content of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. is determined (step S3002).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, the 41st to 42nd parameters, and the display target counters "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter that is the first display target becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In this case, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S3004 or if the process in step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, a setting process for display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and a setting process for display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is "0" and the first parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "A" on the first notification display device 201 is sent to the first display IC 205. At the same time, display data for displaying "1" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. For example, if the value of the display target counter is "24" and the 42nd parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "O" on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display. At the same time as being output to the IC 205, display data for displaying "2" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206.

Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the tens digit and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the result of multiplying the read parameter by 100 are displayed. It is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the tens digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed. Display control is performed on the notification display device 204 (step S3011). For example, if the result multiplied by 100 is "53", display data for displaying "5" on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and at the same time, it is output to the fourth notification display device 204. Display data for displaying "3" is output to the fourth display IC 208.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

By executing the display processing as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. By performing the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 can be simplified.

The display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 starts after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similar to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the gaming history management results calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped are displayed.

The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is supplied, and the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data control the display. Therefore, after the display of the game history management results has started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will not be turned off (that is, non-displayed), but will be turned on corresponding to some display ( In other words, the display state).

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56.

First, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are placed in a non-display state. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, all the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 are in a non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process for maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is If it is in a display state, it is a process of turning it into a non-display state.

Thereafter, the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3102). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a process to start displaying the set value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start process, display data for displaying "1" is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process in step S3108 is executed, a process to update the display of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. Thereby, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process in step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processes from step S3105 onward are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), a process to start displaying the management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

In the display start processing, a management result display start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112, which has received the management result display start command, executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, a display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the game history management results are displayed and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are updated will be explained. FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management results are displayed, and FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting state of the notification device 10 is changed. FIG.

When the game history management results are displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light-emitting state, as shown in FIG. 57(a). In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. This is the same regardless of which of the 1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters are to be notified. . As a result, the manager of the game hall can visually check that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to grasp that the game history management results are displayed.

On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, as shown in FIG. 57(b). In other words, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In this way, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 goes into a non-display state. The manager of the game hall can understand that the display corresponding to the set value is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and can clearly understand the current set value. becomes possible.

Next, the manner in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enter the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 58(a) to 58(h). FIG. 58(a) shows the period of the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58(b) shows the update of the setting display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 58(c) shows the period for displaying the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58(d) shows the period for displaying the management results of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 58(e) shows the period during which the first notification display device 201 is in the display state, and FIG. 58(g) shows a period in which the second notification display device 202 is in the display state, FIG. 58(h) shows a period in which the third notification display device 203 is in the display state, and FIG. This indicates the period during which the display device 204 is in the display state.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 58(a) by starting supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key insertion part 68a turned on. It becomes a changeable state where it can be changed. At the timing t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58(b), and the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state and continues the display state as shown in FIG. 58(h). In this case, since "Setting 1" is selected, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, all display segments are turned off. maintained.

Thereafter, by operating the update button 68b to change the set value at each of timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, and timing t5, each of these timings is changed as shown in FIG. 58(b). This is the timing to update the setting value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(h), the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 is switched to the number corresponding to the changed setting value at each of these timings, but this display content switching The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including each timing when the notification is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state at each of these setting value display update timings, that is, all display devices are in the non-display state. The segment remains unlit.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off at timing t6, thereby ending the changeable state as shown in FIG. 58(a). In this case, at the timing t6, the display period of the gaming history management results starts as shown in FIG. 58(c). Specifically, display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state, and the fourth notification display is Although the display contents of the device 204 are changed, the display state is maintained.

Thereafter, the display of the game history management results is updated at timing t7, timing t8, timing t9, timing t10, timing t11, and timing t12, respectively, as shown in FIG. 58(d). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(h), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display content corresponding to the management result of the gaming history after the update at each timing. However, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state, including the timing at which the display contents are switched.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a corresponding display is displayed. This is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This allows the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to be used not only as display devices for displaying game history management results, but also for displaying the corresponding display in the changeable state. .

This corresponds to the period during which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the state in which setting values can be changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period in which the display is made. As a result, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to identify whether there is a

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged so that when a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is displayed, the display mode is different from the display mode when the game history management result is displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by understanding the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of multiple notification display devices 201 to 204, the display format is increased depending on whether the gaming history management results are displayed or when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed. It becomes possible to make the difference.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203, which are not in the non-display state when displaying the game history management results, are in the non-display state. As a result, by simply checking whether or not the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, you can display the game history management results and the display corresponding to the changeable setting value state. It becomes possible to clearly specify which of these is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state, and the display content is the same as that of the fourth notification display device 204 when displaying the game history management results. This is the display content that can be displayed in . By allowing the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to overlap in this way, it is possible to display the results of management of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value, respectively. This makes it possible to avoid placing restrictions on the displayed content. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 may overlap, if the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the display contents on the first to third notification display devices 204 may overlap. Since 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the game history management results are displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are clearly different between when the game history management results are displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed. becomes possible.

When the gaming history management results are displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in a hidden state even if the type of gaming history management results to be displayed is changed. . This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked in a situation where the gaming history management results are displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked, the game history management results can be displayed and the setting values can be changed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

When a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easier to understand whether or not a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is being displayed.

In a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged horizontally, a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed using only the fourth notification display device 204 located at the right end. It will be done. This makes it easier to understand whether or not a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is being displayed.

When the gaming history management results are displayed, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are used to display a display corresponding to the type of gaming history management results to be displayed. A display corresponding to the content of the game history management result is performed using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. This makes it easier to understand the management results of game history. In this case, in the setting value changeable state, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, which display the type of game history management result, are in a non-display state. As a result, the state in which the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type are not displayed corresponds to the state in which the setting value can be changed, and corresponds to the state in which the setting value can be changed. It becomes easier to understand what is being displayed.

In addition, when a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is displayed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of management result of the game history, but also the game The third notification display device 203 on which the contents of the history management results are displayed also goes into a non-display state. This makes it easier to understand that the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is being displayed.

Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In this configuration, display data is stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. As a result, even if execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped in the main CPU 63 due to the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality, for example (if an affirmative determination is made in step S306), It becomes possible to maintain the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the objects that are in a non-display state (all lights out) in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The present invention is not limited to the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and may be the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. In this case, the third notification display device 203 displays a predetermined display (for example, “5”) that is different from the current setting value, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the current setting value. The configuration may be such that a number corresponding to the number is displayed, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays a predetermined display (for example, "5") that is different from the contents of the current setting value, and the third notification The configuration may be such that the display device 203 displays numbers corresponding to the current setting values. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. Alternatively, the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification display device 202 and third notification display device 203 may be in a display state. It may be configured such that the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights out), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the is displayed.

Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification A configuration may be adopted in which only the display device 202 is in a non-display state (all lights out), a configuration in which only the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state (all lights out), and the fourth notification display device may be in a non-display state (all lights out). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only 204 is in a non-display state (all lights out).

Furthermore, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 may be in the display state. It is good also as a structure where only the third notification display device 203 is in the display state.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the setting value changeable state are different from the above-described eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 59(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 becomes a so-called 7 segment display.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged so that the second notification display device 202 becomes a so-called seven segment display.

FIG. 60 shows a case where the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in a changeable state where the setting state can be changed. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in FIG.

The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the game history management results are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, the first notification display device 201 displays “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, or “O”, and the second notification display device 202 displays “1” to “8”. ” will be displayed.

In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, It becomes a light emitting target in at least one type of display of "O". In other words, regardless of whether "A", "E", "H", "L", or "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not subject to light emission are Doesn't exist.

Similarly, regarding the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 corresponds to “1” to “8” in the second notification display device 202. The light is emitted in at least one type of display among the displays. That is, even when displaying any of "1" to "8" on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not subject to light emission.

In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e of the first notification display device 201 are in a light emitting state. As already explained, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a light-emitting state when the first notification display device 201 displays the game history management results. Furthermore, in any case where the game history management results are displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state.The display content of the first notification display device 201 is the management of game history. Does not exist when displaying results. As a result, in the setting value changeable state, display segments 201b and 201e that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management results of the gaming history are used, but the display is not displayed when displaying the management results of the gaming history. It becomes possible to display the mode on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to display a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible.

In the setting value changeable state, the third display segment 202c of the second notification display device 202 is in a light emitting state. As already explained, the third display segment 202c can be in a light emitting state when the second notification display device 202 displays the game history management results. On the other hand, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in which only the third display segment 202c among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in a light emitting state exists when displaying the management results of game history. I haven't. As a result, while the display segment 202c that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management results of gaming history in the setting value changeable state is used, a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the management results of gaming history can be used. It becomes possible to display it on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, it is possible to cause the second notification display device 202 to display a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61.

First, a process to start displaying set values on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in a light-off state. This display data is output to the first display IC 205. Further, regarding the second notification display device 202, display data is outputted to the second display IC 206 such that the third display segment 202c is in a light-emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in a light-off state. As a result, a display is started on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is in a changeable state in which the setting state can be changed.

Thereafter, a process of turning off the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is placed in a non-display state.

Thereafter, the set value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3203). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a process to start displaying the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start process, display data for displaying "1" is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process in step S3209 is executed, a process for updating the display of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. Thereby, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process in step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processes from step S3206 onwards are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), a process to start displaying the management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

In the display start processing, a management result display start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112, which has received the management result display start command, executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, a display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Setting values can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which can be in a light emitting state when the game history management results are displayed, to a light emitting state. A display corresponding to the status is performed. As a result, in order to diversify the display of the gaming history management results, it is possible to minimize restrictions on the content of the display corresponding to the gaming history management results. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202a, which are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is performed. The combination 202g does not exist when the game history management results are displayed. As a result, by understanding the combinations of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in a light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the game history management results are displayed. It becomes possible to grasp which display is being performed among the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value.

Regarding each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that do not emit light even if all patterns of game history management results are displayed. I haven't. This makes it possible to minimize restrictions on the display contents of the gaming history management results in order to diversify the display corresponding to the gaming history management results.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203, which does not go into the non-display state when displaying the game history management result, becomes the non-display state. As a result, by checking not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, the game history It becomes possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that this configuration is limited to a configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set. The configuration may be such that multiple types are set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents is determined in advance, and each time the changeable state is newly executed, the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order. Even if there are multiple types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value in this way, these display contents are displayed in the display segment 201a which becomes a light emitting state when displaying the management results of the game history. 201g, 202a to 202g, and the display content is not displayed when the game history management results are displayed.

In addition, in one of the cases where the management results of the game history are displayed and the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices are used. A configuration may be adopted in which a blinking display is performed in 201 and 202, and a display that remains lit is performed in the other. In this case, the administrator of the game hall can specify whether the display corresponds to the display of the game history management results or the changeable state depending on whether the display is blinking or lit. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management results of the gaming history. It may be a combination that is not used when displaying the results. Further, the lighting period and the lights-out period in the blinking display may be the same in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely different from each other. , it is also possible to have a configuration in which only a portion thereof overlaps.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the eleventh embodiment in that when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a corresponding display is made using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. There is. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main side RAM 65.

The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing abnormal state information to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. It is possible to store one piece of information about the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d. That is, the abnormality display area 211 can store and hold a maximum of four pieces of information about abnormal states of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, in this embodiment, all information regarding abnormal conditions occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the main CPU 63. For example, if an abnormality regarding the payout of game balls (for example, the lower tray 56a is full, there are no balls in the tank 75, or an abnormality in the payout device 76) occurs, a command corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is sent to the payout side CPU 92. The information is transmitted from the host CPU 63 to the main CPU 63. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an unauthorized radio wave, a corresponding abnormality signal is sent to the main CPU 63, and an abnormality signal is sent to the main CPU 63. When the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, a corresponding abnormality signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, based on identifying that the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a no longer transmit normal signals, the occurrence of a disconnection abnormality in the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a is determined.

The number of types of abnormal states specified by the main CPU 63 is greater than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information will be generated even though the maximum number of abnormal state information has already been stored in the abnormality display area 211. On the other hand, storage priority is set for abnormal state information at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and in a situation where the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormality display area 211, a new If an abnormal state occurs in the abnormal state, information on the abnormal state with a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to give priority to notification of an abnormal state with a high storage priority.

Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. Note that the abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether an abnormal display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of abnormalities to be displayed include fullness of the lower tray 56a, no balls in the tank 75, abnormality in dispensing by the dispensing device 76, abnormality in radio wave detection, abnormality in vibration detection, and disconnection abnormality in each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, whether information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has already been stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. is determined (step S3302). If it has already been stored, the abnormal state information corresponding to the currently occurring abnormality display target is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. This makes it possible to prevent information on the same type of abnormal state from being stored redundantly in the abnormality display area 211.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormal state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormality display area 211.

If the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), a priority comparison process is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first of all the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is identified. The memory priority is predetermined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the lower tray 56a is full → there are no balls in the tank 75 → abnormality in vibration detection → abnormality in dispensing by the dispensing device 76 → entering ball detection sensor 42a The storage priority increases in the order of ~49a disconnection abnormality → radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, which of the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has a higher storage priority. Compare and judge whether

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. As a result, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on abnormal conditions with a high storage priority can be stored. It becomes possible to leave it in the abnormality display area 211.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), a setting process for the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the abnormality display area 211 setting process executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the current occurrence Overwrites the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormality display target.

On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality target counter in the main side RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), after adding 1 to the value of the abnormality target counter (step S3307), the setting process of the abnormality display area 211 is performed. (Step S3306). In this setting process, one area is selected from among the unit areas 211a to 211d in which abnormal state information is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is displayed in the selected area. Stores information about.

Note that in step S3306, if there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the n-th unit area 211a to 211b, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n".

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether a cancellation event of the abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether a command indicating that the lower tray 56a is no longer full, that the tank 75 is no longer filled with balls, or that the dispensing abnormality caused by the dispensing device 76 has been received from the dispensing side CPU 92 is determined. judge. In addition, whether or not an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality, whether or not an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a vibration detection abnormality, or whether an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a disconnection abnormality. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, a process for erasing the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In this erasing process, it is determined whether or not information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has been canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. , if it is stored, clear the area where it is stored to "0" to erase the information about the abnormal state. In this case, if there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormality display area 211 after erasing, the information about that abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Furthermore, the value of the abnormality target counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3310).

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an operation to start abnormality display has occurred (step S3311). The operation to start the abnormality display is performed by pressing the update button 68b while opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not in a changeable state in which the setting state can be changed. This is done by manipulating.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether information on one or more abnormal conditions is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). If abnormal state information is not stored, abnormality display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. This makes it possible to prevent abnormality display from starting even though there is no abnormality information to be reported.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the abnormality displaying flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3313). The abnormality displaying flag stops the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and starts the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormality display area 211 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the current situation is such that it should be carried out in the next step. Note that even if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag has already been set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

Thereafter, a setting process for canceling the display of management results is executed (step S3314). In the cancellation setting process, a display cancellation command is sent to the management CPU 112 to temporarily stop updating the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Upon receiving the display stop command, the management CPU 112 stops execution of the display process (FIG. 55). However, even if the management CPU 112 receives the display stop command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the game history management results at that point will continue on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Ru.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an operation to end abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). To terminate the abnormality display, press the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward relative to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not in a changeable state where the setting state can be changed. This is done by manipulating. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). Note that even if the abnormal display termination operation is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

Thereafter, a process for canceling the display of management results is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management CPU 112, it is possible to confirm that the update of the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has been canceled. unlock. Upon receiving the cancellation cancellation command, the management CPU 112 resumes execution of the display process (FIG. 55). However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormality display at that point continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, the management CPU 112 continues to store history information and calculate various parameters even when updating of the display of game history management results is stopped, and the results of calculating various parameters are It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the state in which the update of the display of the gaming history management results is canceled is canceled, the display of the most recent gaming history management results will be immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be restarted.

In the abnormality setting process, if the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3318: YES), an abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing abnormality display processing.

First, a process of turning off the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in a non-display state.

Thereafter, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the timing to update the display contents of the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Note that if the value of the update timing counter is already "0", that state is maintained. Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the update timing counter is "0", it is determined whether it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ( Step S3403).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, updating processing of a display target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In the update process, if this is the first abnormality display process after the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the display target counter is set to "0". The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. Specifically, the value of "0" of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The value "1" of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the value "2" of the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and the value "3" of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b. ” corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update process, if this is not the first abnormality display process after the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", the value of the display target counter is incremented by one.

Thereafter, it is determined whether abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as already explained, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, that abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored. In this case, abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, if abnormal state information is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. In addition, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3", the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so the abnormal state information is treated as not being stored. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that in a situation where an abnormality display is being performed, all the abnormal conditions that are the target of the abnormality display are canceled. In this case, even in a situation where the abnormality display process is executed, no abnormal state information is stored in the abnormality display area 211. In such a situation, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 display a message indicating that no abnormal state information is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S3405, or when the process in step S3406 is executed, display data to be displayed corresponding to the value of the display target counter in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main side RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 is read out. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are set for each type of abnormal state information. They are different. Further, there is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data is different from display data corresponding to abnormal state information. Therefore, when abnormal state information does not exist, the display content of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 becomes different from the display content when abnormal state information exists.

On the other hand, the display contents of the display corresponding to the abnormal state information and the display contents of the display corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are This overlaps with the display content when the game history management results are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content of the setting value on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when displaying the game history management results, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In this state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, and the fourth notification display device 204 is in a display state, and when an abnormality is displayed, the first and second notification display devices are in a non-display state. 201 and 202 go into a non-display state, and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 go into a display state, so even if the display contents overlap as described above, it corresponds to either situation. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to understand whether the information is displayed or not.

Thereafter, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled according to the display data read out in step S3407 (step S3408), and the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3409). In this case, whether the display corresponding to the abnormal state information or the case where the display corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information is performed, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 203 None of the display devices 204 are in a non-display state (that is, they are not in a completely off state), but are in some display state.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main side RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. will be carried out. This allows the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to be used not only as display devices for displaying game history management results but also as display devices for displaying abnormal conditions.

When causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display a display corresponding to the abnormal condition when no abnormal condition has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A display corresponding to the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred is performed. This makes it possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The period during which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period in which As a result, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is being performed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to identify whether there is a

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged so that when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the display mode is different from the display mode when the game history management results are displayed. Display controlled. Thereby, by understanding the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of multiple notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode can be made larger depending on whether the game history management results are displayed or when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It becomes possible to make the difference.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which are not in a non-display state when displaying the game history management results, become a non-display state. As a result, by simply checking whether the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, the management results of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed. It becomes possible to clearly specify which of these is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in a display state, and the display content is , the display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. By making it possible for the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 to overlap in this way, when the game history management results are displayed, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is It becomes possible to avoid imposing restrictions on the display contents in each case. Furthermore, even if the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can overlap in this way, when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the first and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 Since the second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where no abnormality information is stored in the abnormality display area 211, the abnormality information will be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that point. The configuration may be such that a display corresponding to the fact that the information is not stored is displayed.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In this embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start standard. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the number corresponds to the value or more, and when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value. The storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. In contrast, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball entering results and the like during the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, a start management counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "7" (step S3502). The start management counter indicates which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is used to specify the detection state of a game ball in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1". This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start management counter is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, if the value of the starting management counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1". If the value of the start management counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the start management is performed. If the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1" and the value of the starting management counter is If the value is "4" and corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the starting management counter is "3" and the first If it corresponds to the operating port detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the starting management counter is "2", the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the start management counter is "1" and it corresponds to the output port 24a, determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1". As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The ejected number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to "1".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the discharge number counter is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to "300", it is not limited to this and may be configured to have a number less than "300" or may be configured to have a number greater than "300". .

If a negative determination is made in step S3503 or if a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start management counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether the value of the start management counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S3508). If a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the present management output process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main side RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). After that, management processing is executed (step S3510). Furthermore, if the management start flag is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the management process is also executed (step S3510). The processing contents of the management process are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value. storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. In contrast, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball entering results and the like during the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

Here, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above, until the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the history is used. In a configuration in which history information is not stored in the memory 117, it is not possible to calculate the management results of the gaming history during that time. Therefore, in such a situation, a configuration may be adopted in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display corresponding to the situation. For example, all the display segments in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to be in a light emitting state. This display content is not displayed either when displaying the management results of the game history or when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not history information is not stored as described above.

Furthermore, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the setting mode of the information of the management start flag in the main side RAM 65 differs depending on whether the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has become changeable or not. It is also possible to have a configuration in which FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the other embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Steps S3601 to S3609 execute the same processes as steps S101 to S109 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment, and steps S3611 to S3620 execute the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment. The same processing as step S110 to step S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this alternative embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and after the process of step S3620 is executed, the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared. is set to "1" (step S3621). According to this configuration, if the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the value exceeds the management start reference value, and when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the History information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls ejected after the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the time of shipping the Pachinko machine 10 does not apply.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Instead of a configuration in which there is no history memory 117, an area may be provided for storing history information until the total number of game balls reaches a management start reference value or more. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management result in the situation.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. A configuration may be adopted in which a condition in which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where no history information is stored in the history memory 117 may be added as a condition for the occurrence of a situation where no history information is stored. In this case, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information has already been stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is the management start criterion. History information will be stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether the value is greater than or equal to the value.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or in place of the configuration, if an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for events that occur in abnormal situations.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for events that occur when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated, but in addition to or in place of this, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is It may be configured to calculate the result of dividing by the total number of game balls discharged from the PA. In addition to or in place of this, there is also a configuration that calculates the result of dividing the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34. You can also use it as

(2) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode, the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode and the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. However, in addition to or in place of this, it may be configured to calculate the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. In addition to or in place of this, the result is calculated by dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34. It may also be a configuration.

(3) A configuration may be adopted in which not only the jackpot result but also the small win result exists as the game result that triggers the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode. If the result is a small win, the open/close execution mode occurs, but the win/fail lottery mode and support mode are not changed before and after the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, the opening/closing execution mode that results in a small win may be configured to become a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when a jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a small win result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small win result is stored in the history memory 117. The configuration may be such that the information is stored in the memory 117 for use. Further, in this configuration, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of a jackpot result and a parameter indicating a frequency of occurrence of a small win result may be calculated by using history information stored in the history memory 117.

Further, the probability of winning a small winning result may be configured to change depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may be configured not to change. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning a small winning result changes depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it may be configured such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the small winning result, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the small winning result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of such occurrence is low.

In addition, in a configuration in which there is a small hit result, reservation information is obtained when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 and retention information is obtained when a game ball enters the second operating port 34. The distribution ratio of the type of jackpot result in the case of a jackpot result is different depending on the pending information, and when aiming to enter the first operation port 33, the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA The firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the area on the left side, and when aiming the ball to enter the second operating port 34, the game ball flows down the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The configuration may be such that the firing operation is performed as shown in FIG.

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may exist as a management result of the game history. Note that the normal period is the sum of the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the execution period of the low frequency support mode instead of the opening/closing execution mode. do. In addition, the number of balls entering the out port 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entering K51, the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 during the normal period is the number K52 of entering balls, and the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 during the normal period. The number of balls entering the first operating port 33 during the normal period is K54, and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 during the normal period is the number K55 of entering balls.
-51st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out during the regular period (K52 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K53 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K54 x "1st Ratio of "Number of prize balls for winning in the operating port 33" + K55 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls discharged from the technique area PA during the normal period (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55) Above In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, if the probability of winning a small win varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter may vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. becomes. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter be deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, if the winning probability of the small winning result does not vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

(4) Instead of a configuration in which history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs, history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result is stored. may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence is calculated for each type of jackpot result.

(5) Although the configuration was such that various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated periodically, It is not limited to this, and for example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 10,000 balls), and the The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated when the supply of operating power is stopped, or the various parameters may be calculated when the number of game executions reaches the calculation trigger count (for example, 1000 times). good. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" at the timing when various parameters are calculated.

(6) Every time it is time to calculate various parameters, all of the 1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated. Although the configuration is described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the above various parameters are subject to calculation at one calculation timing, and the parameter groups to be calculated are sequentially changed each time the calculation timing comes. It may also be a configuration. For example, at one calculation timing, the 1st to 8th parameters are calculated, at the next calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, and then A configuration may be adopted in which the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the change of the calculation target in the above order is repeated every time the calculation timing comes. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating parameters when one calculation timing is reached.

(7) The configuration may be such that calculations of various parameters are executed using history information in the history memory 117 on the condition that a game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that calculations of various parameters are executed on the condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent calculations of various parameters from being needlessly repeated even though no game is being played.

(8) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and a configuration in which the functions of the management IC 66 are performed by the main CPU 63 may be adopted. In this case, the correspondence information will be stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 are provided separately from the main RAM 65. A configuration may be adopted in which the function of the storage memory 171 is fulfilled. In a configuration where the main side RAM 65 functions as the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171, when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are It may be configured such that part or all of the areas corresponding to each of the memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are cleared to "0." The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from the target of "0" clearing, and may be configured to be cleared to "0" when the corresponding clearing conditions in each of the above embodiments are satisfied. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the main RAM 65 to have different manual operations for executing clear processing in areas corresponding to the history memory 117, calculation result memory 131, and separate storage memory 171 and other areas. good. Alternatively, the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

(9) When a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information in the history memory 117 is not deleted and is retained, while the various information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is A configuration may also be adopted in which the parameters are deleted. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before a new setting is made after a new setting is made.

(10) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed by the main CPU 63), the corresponding If the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the clearing process of the history memory 117 may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing setting values in the main side RAM 65 is configured so that it is not cleared to "0" even if the entire clearing process (step S117) is executed, so that the setting value update process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether the set value has been changed before or after step S118). In this case, if the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed in the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 If it is determined that a setting value has been changed, a signal may be output to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 executes a setting update recognition process.

Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been made is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 can refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 determines that the setting value has not been changed, the history memory 117 is not cleared, and the management CPU 112 determines that the setting value has been changed. In this case, the history memory 117 can be cleared.

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value update process is executed by the main CPU 63), the corresponding If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the configuration may be such that calculation processing of various parameters is not executed based on the new setting of the setting state. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated based on a new setting of the setting state even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing setting values in the main side RAM 65 is configured so that it is not cleared to "0" even if the entire clearing process (step S117) is executed, so that the setting value update process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether the set value has been changed before or after step S118). In this case, if the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed in the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 If it is determined that a setting value has been changed, a signal may be output to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 executes a setting update recognition process.

Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been made is received from the main side CPU 63, the management side CPU 112 can refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 determines that the setting values have not been changed, calculations of various parameters triggered by new settings in the current setting state are not executed, and the management CPU 112 When it is determined that a value has been changed, calculations of various parameters can be executed using the new setting of the current setting state as an opportunity.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, various parameters are calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that point. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to "0". In this case, since there is no need to calculate various parameters under the situation where a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to quickly complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171. Become.

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. It may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or other display devices. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation section, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation section for performing other operations. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171.

(14) The out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this The structure is not limited to, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are subject to storage of history information. You can also use it as For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storing history information, or a configuration in which only the general winning opening 31 is subject to storing historical information may be adopted. It's good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball during a predetermined period with respect to the ball entry part for which the history information is stored.

(15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball in correspondence with each of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. 118a to 118c have been set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of ball entry part may be used if there are multiple ball entry parts of the same type. Even if the configuration includes a plurality of ball entry detection sensors, the configuration may be such that the information is transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to suppress the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(16) Correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is configured to be sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66; The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the correspondence information is stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence relationship information, so it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(17) Correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although the configuration is such that this is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, bidirectional communication is enabled between the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66, and the management IC 66 requests transmission of correspondence information. A configuration may also be adopted in which correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a nonvolatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is transferred to the main CPU 63. The configuration is such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the information is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) Correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by each ball entry detection sensor. 42a to 48a, the signal paths 118a to 118g are used to transmit the information, but the configuration is not limited to this, and correspondence information can be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. A configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated signal path for transmission is provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information it is receiving from the main CPU 63 based on the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(19) Although information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, information is not sent from the management IC 66 to the main side CPU 63, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which information is transmitted to the side CPU 63. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on history information are transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters are performed, and the main CPU 63 By sending commands corresponding to the contents of the parameters to the audio light emission control device 81, notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emission section 53, and the speaker section 54. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(20) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and The content of various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, etc. In this case, when the gaming hall starts business, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry state of game balls in the gaming area PA on the previous business day was normal.

(21) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the game cannot be started on the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition release operation is performed. You can also use it as As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is prohibited, a configuration in which each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and a configuration in which the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the win/fail determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition cancellation operation may be performed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It is also possible to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal.

(22) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculations of various parameters using the history information are performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. It is also possible to have a configuration in which neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and various parameter calculations may be performed using the read history information by the reading worker. Often, the configuration may be such that an external device executes calculations of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112.

(23) The management IC 66 is provided with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, so even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is possible to output history information or various parameters. Thereby, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it becomes possible to read history information and various parameters with an external device.

(24) Although the reading terminal 68d used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with an external device, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a terminal used for reading historical information or various parameters with an external device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminals used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a location other than the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(25) The correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are not limited to a configuration in which they are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as flash memory; for example, these memories 116, 117, 131 Either one of them is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store information, and by supplying backup power to that memory, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. However, the information may be stored and retained. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main side RAM 65. Good too.

(26) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and executes storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. , a configuration may be adopted in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and also outputs history information to the outside.

(27) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, separate boards, or separate control devices.

(28) Regarding the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the number of balls entered is counted, while the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 A configuration may be adopted in which history information including RTC information is stored regarding the entry of balls into the bonus opportunity entry section that triggers the payout of prize balls and the judgment process. As a result, while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the bonus opportunity ball entry section, it is also possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each bonus opportunity ball entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined event that triggers the storage of history information includes events other than those in the above embodiments. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is in a full state, the timing at which the full state is started, and the timing at which the full state is canceled is stored as history information. It may be configured such that at least one of the fact that there is no ball state, the timing at which the no ball state is started, and the timing at which the no ball state is canceled is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. In particular, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(30) In the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 can recognize that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. You can also use it as Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the setting value update signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the setting value update signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, there is no need to previously set in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(31) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) In the setting value update process (FIG. 10), the display device that displays the setting values that are being updated is not limited to the third notification display device 69c, and may be the symbol display device 41, or may be a dedicated It may be a display device.

(33) The operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. Further, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and a turning operation is performed, positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions, and the setting key is inserted. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

(34) In the first to tenth embodiments described above, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged horizontally, but they may also be arranged vertically. They may be arranged diagonally in parallel, or may be arranged in two levels, one above the other. Further, in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged horizontally, but they may also be arranged vertically, or diagonally. They may be arranged in parallel, or they may be arranged in two rows, one above the other.

(35) History information used to calculate parameters whose normal values vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as history information subject to variation) and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The history information used to calculate parameters whose normal values do not change (hereinafter referred to as non-variable history information) may be stored in different areas in the history memory 117. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area in which the history information to be changed is stored in the history memory 117 is "0". On the other hand, the area in the history memory 117 in which non-variable history information is stored may be cleared to "0" and not cleared. This makes it possible to accurately calculate parameters whose normal values vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 even after changing the setting values, and also prevents the normal values from changing depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be improved.

(36) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio emission control device 81 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 82 controls the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(37) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, when a game is started based on the operation of a start lever, the results of the lottery processing of the winning combinations executed are recorded as history information. It may also be configured to store it as history information and use that history information to calculate the actual winning probability for each role.When a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history information is stored as history information. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using the information, or the ratio of the number of games staying in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or the gaming machine itself may provide notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which there are multiple setting states such as "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", and the probability of winning in the winning combination processing is varied depending on the setting state. In this case, the configurations in each of the above embodiments may be applied regarding handling of history information, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated changes when a setting state setting is newly set or a setting value is changed. .

(38) The characteristic configurations of the first to fourteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment may be combined; The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment are combined. Good too. Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fourteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the above-mentioned other embodiments may be applied in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
information erasing means (third In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112. (a function to execute the process in step S2308, in the eighth embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2608 in the management CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, at least a portion of the history information stored in the history storage means is erased on at least one condition that a setting value to be used has been newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be appropriately managed in the situation after a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. .

Feature A2. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature A2, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result depending on a set value. In this case, by having the configuration of feature A1 above, the history storage means can be used to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a situation after the probability of the assignment response result is changed. It becomes possible to adjust the content.

Feature A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means on at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

According to feature A3, when a setting value to be used is newly set, all the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted, so that the setting value to be used is changed. It becomes possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event based on the timing when the event is newly performed.

Feature A4. The information erasing means erases some of the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition being that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that part of the history information stored in the history storage means is retained.

According to feature A4, when a setting value to be used is newly set, history information that is unnecessary for the subsequent management of the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event is deleted, and the history information that is unnecessary for the subsequent management of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is It becomes possible to leave necessary history information. This makes it possible to suitably manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (history indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value; information) and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected from the game area PA) that does not change according to the setting value,
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storage means on at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, and The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the second history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to feature A5, when a new set value is set to be used, the first history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability changes according to the set value is deleted, and the occurrence probability is changed to the set value. The second history information corresponding to a predetermined event that does not change depending on the event is not deleted. As a result, when the first history information before the setting value to be used is newly set is carried over after the setting value is newly set, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information occurs. The first history information that is undesirable for specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set, so that it can be referred to when specifying the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information. Since it is possible to secure a large amount of second history information, it is possible to accurately identify the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The configuration is such that the probability of the granting result being the granting result in the granting determination varies depending on the set value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the award of the benefit,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to game balls being ejected from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

According to feature A6, since the probability of granting a benefit varies depending on the setting value, the first history information should be deleted when the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to specify the frequency of granting benefits under the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency at which game balls are ejected from the gaming area does not change depending on the setting value, the second history information is not deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set. It becomes possible to accurately specify the frequency at which game balls are ejected from the game area in a predetermined manner.

Feature A7. The information erasing means deletes at least one of the history information when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein a part of the gaming machine is erased.

According to feature A7, if a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage means, the history information is not deleted even if a new set value to be used is set. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being repeatedly erased from the history storage means even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is played.

Feature A8. With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information derivation means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

According to feature A8, having the configuration of feature A1 above, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is stored on at least one condition that a new setting value to be used has been set. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode in which the history information stored in the history storage means is used to correspond to the gaming results in a predetermined period when a new setting value to be used is set. Information is derived. As a result, even if at least part of the history information is erased when the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history such as the frequency of occurrence of specified events in the situation before the setting value was changed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature A9, when a new set value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of mode information in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history over a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where a game is actually being played is retained in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the

Feature A11. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
This gaming machine includes a means (in the third embodiment, a means for executing special processing in the management side CPU 112) when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature A11, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature A12, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived in vain. .

Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means. If a specified amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, before the setting value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted.

According to feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the setting is not stored before the setting is made. The history information that was previously saved will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means includes:
If the predetermined event occurs during a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until the cancellation condition is satisfied, the corresponding history information is stored in the first history storage means and A means for storing in both the second history storage means (a function for executing the process of step S2604 in the management CPU 112);
When the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period, means for storing the corresponding history information in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as a storage target. (Function to execute the process of step S2603 in the management CPU 112);
Equipped with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that was previously set as the storage target when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

According to feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the setting is not stored before the setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made. Furthermore, this effect can be produced simply by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. Deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage target. The gaming machine according to feature A14, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature A15, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to a new setting of the setting value, the mode in which the history information is used is It becomes possible to derive information appropriately.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A15, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Equipped with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value to be used is set by the setting means is set as the setting value to be used by the setting means. A game machine characterized in that the history is stored and retained in the history storage means even after the game is played.

According to feature B1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is not deleted but is stored and retained. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage means, and the history information will not be accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time. It becomes possible to specify the management results of the game history using the history information obtained.

Feature B2. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history storage execution means stores the corresponding history information in the history storage means (first storage execution means at the time of setting). In the embodiment, the game according to feature B1 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2408 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Machine.

According to feature B2, in a configuration in which history information is not deleted and is stored and retained even if a setting value to be used is newly set, the setting value to be used is newly set. History information corresponding to this is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before a new setting of the setting value to be used and history information after the setting is made.

Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the storage execution means at the time of setting causes the history storage means to store information corresponding to the set value as the history information. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to feature B3, by referring to history information, it is possible to specify the contents of setting values set in the past.

Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each setting value, it is possible to store history information separately for each setting value.

Feature B5. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, means for making the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the setting value for which the setting is to be stored for the subsequent history information (management side The gaming machine according to feature B4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2406 in the CPU 112.

According to feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to that setting value is to be stored for subsequent history information, so that It becomes possible to distinguish and store history information.

Feature B6. Information derivation means (display output processing in the management side CPU 112 The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to feature B6, in a configuration where history information is stored separately for each setting value, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to the currently set setting value.

Feature B7. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature B7, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result depending on a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
post-setting response means for not erasing the history information until at least a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means; (Function to execute the processing of step S2506 and steps S2605 to S2609 in the management CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, it will not be stored before the setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made.

Feature C2. The post-setting response means sets the setting value when a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means in excess of the specified amount after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted before the above is performed.

According to feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage means that makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period after a new setting value is set. In this case, the history information stored in the history storage means is erased before the new settings are made. This makes it possible to prevent useless history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means includes:
When the predetermined event occurs, means for storing the corresponding history information in the first history storage means and the second history storage means that are set to be stored (step S2603 in the management CPU 112) function) and
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means (management CPU 112) until the specified amount or more is stored. function of executing the process of step S2604);
Equipped with
The post-setting response means are:
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management CPU 112) when the specified amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, means for erasing the history information of the side that has been set as the storage target among the first history storage means and the second history storage means (step S2608 in the management CPU 112) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is made, the setting value is not stored before the setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made. Furthermore, this effect can be produced simply by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. Deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage target. The gaming machine according to feature C3, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to a new setting of the setting value, the manner in which the history information is used is It becomes possible to derive information appropriately.

Feature C5. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature C5, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Special execution means (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112 (a function to execute a process, a function to execute a repeated change monitoring process in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, a function to make a negative determination in step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, the special process is executed with at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to deal with a case where a new set value is set under an unfavorable situation.

Feature D2. Feature D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing on the condition that at least one condition is that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed a specified number of times or more in the special situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation, the special process is not executed if the number of executions is less than a specific number of times. This makes it possible to prevent special processing from being executed even when a regular worker sets a new set value less than a specific number of times in a special situation.

Feature D3. The special execution means is configured to determine, as the special situation, a situation in which no game is played after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, or a setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means. In a situation where a game exceeding a predetermined standard has not been played since the execution of the special processing, the special processing is executed with at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to feature D3, special processing is executed when a new setting value to be used is made in a situation where a game is not being played or a game is not actually being played. If such an act occurs, it will be possible to deal with it.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

According to feature D4, the notification process is executed with at least one condition that a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to prompt the user to take action when a new set value is set under an unfavorable situation.

Feature D5. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information derivation means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a new set value is set to be used, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the gaming results in a predetermined period. derived. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature D6. The special execution means causes the information derivation means to derive the aspect information as the special processing, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set in the special situation. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that the gaming machine does not allow users to perform.

According to feature D6, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is made, if the setting is made in an unfavorable situation, mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent aspect information from being derived in vain.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature D7, when a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of mode information in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history in a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where a game is actually being played is retained in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the

Feature D9. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
Feature D7 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

According to feature D9, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to the feature D10, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game. )and,
With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information deriving means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a new set value is set to be used, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the gaming results in a predetermined period. derived. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature E2, when a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature E3, since it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of mode information in the mode information storage means, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history over a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where a game is actually being played is retained in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the

Feature E4. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
This gaming machine includes a means (in the third embodiment, a means for executing special processing in the management side CPU 112) when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing repeated change monitoring processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature E4, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature E5, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so it is possible to prevent mode information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature E6, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, the above feature D group, and the above feature E group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. (a function to execute the processing from S409 to S412);
a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Equipped with
The grant determination means has a high probability mode and a low probability mode as the grant determination modes such that the probability of the grant corresponding result is relatively high or low,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result changes at least in the low probability mode depending on the set value.

According to feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result at least in the low probability mode in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value. Thereby, even in a single gaming machine, it is possible to create an advantageous or disadvantageous situation with respect to the probability of a grant corresponding result in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the high probability mode does not vary depending on the set value.

According to feature F2, the probability of a grant-compatible result in low probability mode is changed according to the setting value, while the probability of a grant-compatible result in high probability mode is not changed according to the setting value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the setting value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the benefit does not vary depending on the setting value.

According to feature F3, the probability of receiving a corresponding result in low probability mode is changed according to the setting value, while the selection mode of benefits is not changed according to the setting value, thereby reducing the influence of the setting value. can be restricted to situations in low probability mode.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature group F, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, the control means executes a lottery process. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
A second information display control means (step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to another information different from the mode information is displayed In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3101, S3103, and S3109. In the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3201, S3202, and S3204. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

Feature G2. The feature G1 according to feature G1, characterized in that a period in which a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed on the information display means and a period in which a display corresponding to the separate information is performed on the information display means Game machine.

According to feature G2, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to specify.

Feature G3. The second information display control means displays the information corresponding to the separate information by controlling the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein

According to feature G3, by understanding the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to different information is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible.

Feature G4. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that it includes a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature G4, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information. In addition, the presence of multiple individual information display means makes it possible to make the display mode significantly different between when a display corresponding to mode information is displayed and when a display corresponding to different information is displayed. .

Feature G5. When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature G4 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature G5, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature G6. When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a specific individual information display means (the second information display means) which is in a display state when displaying the aspect information among the plurality of individual information display means. In the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification device display device 204) in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine described in feature G5.

According to feature G6, in a specific individual information display means, the display content that can be displayed when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed can also be displayed when a display corresponding to another information is performed, so that the aspect It becomes possible to avoid imposing restrictions on the display contents when displaying information corresponding to the information. Furthermore, even if the specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, it will not be in a non-display state if it has the configuration of feature G5 above and a display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Since a predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed, it is possible to specify which of the plurality of individual information display means is being displayed.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be displayed.

According to feature G7, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so that the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to another information in which the predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. It becomes possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, characterized in that the game machine is not maintained in the same state.

According to feature G8, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature G9. The second information display control means controls one specific individual information display means among the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, the eleventh, and the twelfth display devices). In the embodiment, any one of features G5 to G8 is characterized in that the fourth notification display device 204) displays a display corresponding to the separate information, and the remaining individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature G9, when a display corresponding to separate information is performed, only one individual information display means is in the display state, so it is easy to understand whether or not a display corresponding to separate information is being performed. Become.

Feature G10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end in the predetermined direction of the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction.

According to feature G10, since one individual information display means in which a display corresponding to separate information is displayed is located at an end in a predetermined direction, it is possible to determine whether or not a display corresponding to separate information is being performed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh ~ In the fourteenth embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for displaying results (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c; in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the individual information display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c) A display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means for the type display target.

According to feature G11, when a display corresponding to aspect information is to be performed, a display corresponding to the type of aspect information to be displayed is performed on the individual information display means for the type display target, and an individual information display for the result display target is performed. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the mode information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to separate information is performed, the individual information display means for which the type is displayed is hidden, so the state in which the type display is hidden corresponds to the separate information. It will be easier to understand if separate information is displayed.

Feature G12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting parts (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts. It is a configuration that allows
The second information display control means corresponds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be set in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, into a light emitting state. A combination of the unit light emitting parts that becomes a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the other information is displayed does not exist when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be a combination.

According to feature G12, when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed, a unit light emitting section that can be set to a light emitting state is set to a light emitting state, whereby a display corresponding to another information is performed, and a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. In order to diversify the information, it is possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the aspect information. On the other hand, a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to mode information is performed. Thereby, by understanding the combination of unit light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state, it becomes possible to understand which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed.

Feature G13. There are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to feature G12, wherein among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, there is no unit light emitting part that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

According to feature G13, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting parts of any combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the aspect information, It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature G14. Specific individual information display means as the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including a third notification display device 203 and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided,
When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature G12 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

According to feature G14, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to mode information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature G15. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature G15, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to the currently selected setting value to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature G16, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for displaying the setting value that is being changed.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature G17, the information display means for displaying a display corresponding to mode information can also be used as a display means for displaying a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine.

Feature G18. The second information display control means is characterized in that when displaying a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state does not occur, the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature G17.

According to feature G18, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
A second information display control means (step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to another information different from the mode information is displayed In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3101, S3103, and S3109. In the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3201, S3202, and S3204. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Equipped with
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting parts (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting parts. It is a configuration that allows
The second information display control means corresponds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be set in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, into a light emitting state. A combination of the unit light emitting parts that becomes a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the other information is displayed does not exist when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it allows combinations to be made.

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the mode information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of gaming history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

In addition, display corresponding to different information is performed by setting a unit light-emitting section to a light-emitting state, which can be set to a light-emitting state when a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the mode information. It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the mode information. On the other hand, a combination of unit light emitting parts that are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to mode information is performed. Thereby, by understanding the combination of unit light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state, it becomes possible to understand which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to feature H1, wherein among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, there is no unit light emitting part that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

According to feature H2, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting parts of any combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the aspect information, It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature H3. Specific individual information display means as the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including a third notification display device 203 and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided,
When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature H1 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

According to feature H3, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be performed.

According to feature H4, when a display corresponding to mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in a display state, so that a predetermined individual information display means corresponds to another information that is in a non-display state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, characterized in that the game machine is not maintained in the same state.

According to feature H5, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature H6. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature H6, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to the currently selected setting value to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature H7, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the aspect information can also be used as the display means for displaying the setting value that is being changed.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
A first information display control means (management side a function of executing display processing in the CPU 112);
a second information display control means (a function for executing abnormality display processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. In addition, the information display means not only displays the mode information but also displays the abnormal state of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

Feature I2. The second information display control means is characterized in that when displaying a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state does not occur, the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the fact that the abnormal state does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to feature I2, it is possible to clearly identify whether an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Feature I3. Feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed on the information display means and a period during which a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display means is distinguished. The game machine described.

According to feature I3, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to specify.

Feature I4. The second information display control means displays a display corresponding to the abnormal state by controlling the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein

According to feature I4, by understanding the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible.

Feature I5. Features I1 to I4 characterized in that the information display means includes a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) each capable of displaying a plurality of types of information. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature I5, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information. Furthermore, by having multiple individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode significantly different between when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. .

Feature I6. When causing a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state.

According to feature I6, the predetermined individual information display means, which does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to mode information is performed, becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to an abnormal state is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature I7. When causing a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a specific individual information display means (the second information display means) which is in a display state when displaying the aspect information among the plurality of individual information display means. The third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are brought into a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to feature I7, in the specific individual information display means, the display contents that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, so that the aspect It becomes possible to avoid placing restrictions on the display content when displaying information corresponding to the information. Furthermore, even if a specific individual information display means has a configuration that can display the same display content, it will not become a non-display state if it has the configuration of feature I7 above and a display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Since a predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state when a display corresponding to an abnormal state is performed, it is possible to specify which of the plurality of individual information display means is being displayed.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when causing the display corresponding to the mode information to be displayed.

According to feature I8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so this corresponds to an abnormal state in which a predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized in that the game machine is configured such that the game machine is not maintained in the same state.

According to feature I9, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display corresponding to the aspect information, the information display means does not display any information. A game machine characterized by preventing the game machine from being maintained in a state.

According to feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the mode information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of gaming history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Moreover, when display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the aspect information, regardless of the timing at which the information display means is checked.

Feature J2. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature J2, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be performed.

According to feature J3, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, and even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed, the display state is not changed. maintained. This makes it easier to understand the mode information.

Feature J4. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh ~ In the fourteenth embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for displaying results (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c; in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the individual information display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c) The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein a display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

According to feature J4, when a display corresponding to aspect information is to be performed, a display corresponding to the type of aspect information to be displayed is performed on the individual information display means for the type display target, and an individual information display to be displayed as a result is performed. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the mode information to be displayed.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); ),
The history storage execution means is a means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs in a restricted situation (a function for making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main MPU 63). ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, in a restricted situation, history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs, so it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in situations where it is undesirable to store history information. .

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction release event occurs.

According to feature K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power from being stored as history information.

Feature K3. means for setting the restrictive state when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and a restrictive condition is satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S3610 in the main MPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the restrictive state when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restrictive condition is not satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S3621 in the main MPU 63) and,
The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K3, there are cases in which a restriction situation is set and cases in which it is not set, depending on whether or not a restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to avoid being set to a restricted status as needed.

Feature K4. The limiting situation may occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area exceeds a predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

According to feature K4, it is possible to prevent history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, and features K1 to K4 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature G group, the above feature H group, the above feature I group, the above feature J group, and the above feature K group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

10... Pachinko machine, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 63... Main side CPU, 112... Management side CPU, 117... Memory for history, 171... Memory for separate storage, 181 to 186... Setting 1 ~6 history memory, 191...first history memory, 192...second history memory, 69a...first notification display device, 69b...second notification display device, 69c...third notification display device , 201...First notification display device, 201a-201g...Display segment, 202...Second notification display device, 202a-202g...Display segment, 203...Third notification display device, 204...Fourth notification device Display device.

Claims (1)

history storage execution means for storing game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring in the history storage means when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game;
information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means;
a first information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is displayed;
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display corresponding to the aspect information, the information display means does not display any information. A game machine characterized by preventing the game machine from being maintained in a state.

Images